Annotation of embedaddon/readline/doc/texinfo.tex, revision 1.1
1.1 ! misho 1: % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
! 2: %
! 3: % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
! 4: \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
! 5: %
! 6: \def\texinfoversion{2013-09-11.11}
! 7: %
! 8: % Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
! 9: % 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006,
! 10: % 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
! 11: %
! 12: % This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or
! 13: % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
! 14: % published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the
! 15: % License, or (at your option) any later version.
! 16: %
! 17: % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
! 18: % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
! 19: % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
! 20: % General Public License for more details.
! 21: %
! 22: % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
! 23: % along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
! 24: %
! 25: % As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
! 26: % a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
! 27: % restriction. This Exception is an additional permission under section 7
! 28: % of the GNU General Public License, version 3 ("GPLv3").
! 29: %
! 30: % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
! 31: % reports; you can get the latest version from:
! 32: % http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/ (the Texinfo release area), or
! 33: % http://ftpmirror.gnu.org/texinfo/ (same, via a mirror), or
! 34: % http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page)
! 35: % The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
! 36: % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
! 37: %
! 38: % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a
! 39: % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
! 40: % problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
! 41: %
! 42: % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
! 43: % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple
! 44: % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
! 45: % tex foo.texi
! 46: % texindex foo.??
! 47: % tex foo.texi
! 48: % tex foo.texi
! 49: % dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
! 50: % The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
! 51: % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
! 52: % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
! 53: %
! 54: % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
! 55: % extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the
! 56: % full Texinfo distribution.
! 57: %
! 58: % The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
! 59:
! 60:
! 61: \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
! 62:
! 63: % If in a .fmt file, print the version number
! 64: % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
! 65: % they might have appeared in the input file name.
! 66: \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
! 67: \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
! 68:
! 69: \chardef\other=12
! 70:
! 71: % We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
! 72: % For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
! 73: \let\+ = \relax
! 74:
! 75: % Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
! 76: \let\ptexb=\b
! 77: \let\ptexbullet=\bullet
! 78: \let\ptexc=\c
! 79: \let\ptexcomma=\,
! 80: \let\ptexdot=\.
! 81: \let\ptexdots=\dots
! 82: \let\ptexend=\end
! 83: \let\ptexequiv=\equiv
! 84: \let\ptexexclam=\!
! 85: \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
! 86: \let\ptexgtr=>
! 87: \let\ptexhat=^
! 88: \let\ptexi=\i
! 89: \let\ptexindent=\indent
! 90: \let\ptexinsert=\insert
! 91: \let\ptexlbrace=\{
! 92: \let\ptexless=<
! 93: \let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
! 94: \let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
! 95: \let\ptexplus=+
! 96: \let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright
! 97: \let\ptexrbrace=\}
! 98: \let\ptexslash=\/
! 99: \let\ptexstar=\*
! 100: \let\ptext=\t
! 101: \let\ptextop=\top
! 102: {\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% active in plain's math mode
! 103:
! 104: % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
! 105: % starts a new line in the output.
! 106: \newlinechar = `^^J
! 107:
! 108: % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
! 109: % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
! 110: %
! 111: \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
! 112: \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
! 113: \else
! 114: \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
! 115: \fi
! 116:
! 117: % Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
! 118: \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
! 119: \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
! 120: \ifx\putworderror\undefined \gdef\putworderror{error}\fi
! 121: \ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
! 122: \ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
! 123: \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
! 124: \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
! 125: \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
! 126: \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
! 127: \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
! 128: \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
! 129: \ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
! 130: \ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
! 131: \ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
! 132: \ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
! 133: \ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
! 134: \ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
! 135: \ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
! 136: \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
! 137: \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
! 138: %
! 139: \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
! 140: \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
! 141: \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
! 142: \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
! 143: \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
! 144: \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
! 145: \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
! 146: \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
! 147: \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
! 148: \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
! 149: \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
! 150: \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
! 151: %
! 152: \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
! 153: \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
! 154: \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
! 155: \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
! 156: \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
! 157:
! 158: % Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful.
! 159: \chardef\spacecat = 10
! 160: \def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat}
! 161:
! 162: % sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences.
! 163: \chardef\ampChar = `\&
! 164: \chardef\colonChar = `\:
! 165: \chardef\commaChar = `\,
! 166: \chardef\dashChar = `\-
! 167: \chardef\dotChar = `\.
! 168: \chardef\exclamChar= `\!
! 169: \chardef\hashChar = `\#
! 170: \chardef\lquoteChar= `\`
! 171: \chardef\questChar = `\?
! 172: \chardef\rquoteChar= `\'
! 173: \chardef\semiChar = `\;
! 174: \chardef\slashChar = `\/
! 175: \chardef\underChar = `\_
! 176:
! 177: % Ignore a token.
! 178: %
! 179: \def\gobble#1{}
! 180:
! 181: % The following is used inside several \edef's.
! 182: \def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
! 183:
! 184: % Hyphenation fixes.
! 185: \hyphenation{
! 186: Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
! 187: ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
! 188: data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
! 189: man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
! 190: par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
! 191: spell-ing spell-ings
! 192: stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
! 193: wide-spread wrap-around
! 194: }
! 195:
! 196: % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
! 197: \newdimen\bindingoffset
! 198: \newdimen\normaloffset
! 199: \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
! 200:
! 201: % For a final copy, take out the rectangles
! 202: % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
! 203: % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
! 204: %
! 205: \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt }
! 206:
! 207: % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
! 208: % and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
! 209: % since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make
! 210: % some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
! 211: % file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
! 212: %
! 213: \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
! 214: \def\loggingall{%
! 215: \tracingstats2
! 216: \tracingpages1
! 217: \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex
! 218: \tracingparagraphs1
! 219: \tracingoutput1
! 220: \tracingmacros2
! 221: \tracingrestores1
! 222: \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
! 223: \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined\else % etex gives us more logging
! 224: \tracingscantokens1
! 225: \tracingifs1
! 226: \tracinggroups1
! 227: \tracingnesting2
! 228: \tracingassigns1
! 229: \fi
! 230: \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex
! 231: \errorcontextlines16
! 232: }%
! 233:
! 234: % @errormsg{MSG}. Do the index-like expansions on MSG, but if things
! 235: % aren't perfect, it's not the end of the world, being an error message,
! 236: % after all.
! 237: %
! 238: \def\errormsg{\begingroup \indexnofonts \doerrormsg}
! 239: \def\doerrormsg#1{\errmessage{#1}}
! 240:
! 241: % add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing
! 242: % we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
! 243: %
! 244: \def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
! 245: \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
! 246: \def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
! 247: \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
! 248: \def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
! 249: \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
! 250:
! 251: % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
! 252: %
! 253: \newif\ifcropmarks
! 254: \let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
! 255: %
! 256: % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
! 257: % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
! 258: %
! 259: \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
! 260: \newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc
! 261: \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
! 262: \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
! 263:
! 264: % Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor.
! 265: % We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark.
! 266: % This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark.
! 267: %
! 268: % A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct.
! 269: % \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase.
! 270: %
! 271: % Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter
! 272: % (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top
! 273: % of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. The solution is
! 274: % described on page 260 of The TeXbook. It involves outputting two
! 275: % marks for the sectioning macros, one before the section break, and
! 276: % one after. I won't pretend I can describe this better than DEK...
! 277: \def\domark{%
! 278: \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}%
! 279: \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}%
! 280: \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}%
! 281: \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}%
! 282: \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}%
! 283: \mark{%
! 284: \the\toks0 \the\toks2 % 0: top marks (\last...)
! 285: \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 % 1: bottom marks (default, \prev...)
! 286: \noexpand\else \the\toks8 % 2: color marks
! 287: }%
! 288: }
! 289: % \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title
! 290: % page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us
! 291: % the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g.,
! 292: % @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very
! 293: % first @chapter.
! 294: \def\gettopheadingmarks{%
! 295: \ifcase0\topmark\fi
! 296: \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi
! 297: }
! 298: \def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi}
! 299: \def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi}
! 300:
! 301: % Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors.
! 302: \def\lastchapterdefs{}
! 303: \def\lastsectiondefs{}
! 304: \def\prevchapterdefs{}
! 305: \def\prevsectiondefs{}
! 306: \def\lastcolordefs{}
! 307:
! 308: % Main output routine.
! 309: \chardef\PAGE = 255
! 310: \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
! 311:
! 312: \newbox\headlinebox
! 313: \newbox\footlinebox
! 314:
! 315: % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents
! 316: % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
! 317: \def\onepageout#1{%
! 318: \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
! 319: %
! 320: \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
! 321: \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
! 322: %
! 323: % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
! 324: % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
! 325: \def\commmonheadfootline{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \texinfochars}
! 326: %
! 327: \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi
! 328: \global\setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\commmonheadfootline \makeheadline}%
! 329: %
! 330: \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi
! 331: \global\setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\commmonheadfootline \makefootline}%
! 332: %
! 333: {%
! 334: % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
! 335: % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
! 336: % before the \shipout runs.
! 337: %
! 338: \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output.
! 339: \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
! 340: % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
! 341: % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this:
! 342: % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}}
! 343: % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in;
! 344: % it needs to be
! 345: % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym}
! 346: \shipout\vbox{%
! 347: % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
! 348: \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
! 349: %
! 350: \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
! 351: \hsize = \outerhsize
! 352: \vskip-\topandbottommargin
! 353: \vtop to0pt{%
! 354: \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
! 355: \nointerlineskip
! 356: \line{%
! 357: \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
! 358: \hfill
! 359: \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
! 360: }%
! 361: \vss}%
! 362: \vskip\topandbottommargin
! 363: \line\bgroup
! 364: \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
! 365: \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
! 366: \vbox\bgroup
! 367: \fi
! 368: %
! 369: \unvbox\headlinebox
! 370: \pagebody{#1}%
! 371: \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
! 372: % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
! 373: % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.)
! 374: % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
! 375: \vskip 24pt
! 376: \unvbox\footlinebox
! 377: \fi
! 378: %
! 379: \ifcropmarks
! 380: \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
! 381: \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
! 382: \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
! 383: \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
! 384: \vbox to0pt{\vss
! 385: \line{%
! 386: \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
! 387: \hfill
! 388: \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
! 389: }%
! 390: \nointerlineskip
! 391: \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
! 392: }%
! 393: \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
! 394: \fi
! 395: }% end of \shipout\vbox
! 396: }% end of group with \indexdummies
! 397: \advancepageno
! 398: \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
! 399: }
! 400:
! 401: \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
! 402:
! 403: \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
! 404: {\catcode`\@ =11
! 405: \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
! 406: % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
! 407: \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
! 408: \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
! 409: \dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax
! 410: \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
! 411: \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
! 412: }
! 413:
! 414: % Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are
! 415: % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
! 416: % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
! 417: %
! 418: \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
! 419: \def\nstop{\vbox
! 420: {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
! 421: \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
! 422: \def\nsbot{\vbox
! 423: {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
! 424:
! 425: % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
! 426: % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
! 427: % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
! 428: %
! 429: \def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
! 430: \def\parseargusing#1#2{%
! 431: \def\argtorun{#2}%
! 432: \begingroup
! 433: \obeylines
! 434: \spaceisspace
! 435: #1%
! 436: \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
! 437: }
! 438:
! 439: {\obeylines %
! 440: \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
! 441: \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
! 442: \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
! 443: }%
! 444: }
! 445:
! 446: % First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.
! 447: \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
! 448: \def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
! 449:
! 450: % Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
! 451: %
! 452: % \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
! 453: % @end itemize @c foo
! 454: % This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
! 455: % by \finishparsearg.
! 456: %
! 457: \def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
! 458: \def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
! 459: \def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
! 460: \def\temp{#3}%
! 461: \ifx\temp\empty
! 462: % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp:
! 463: \let\temp\finishparsearg
! 464: \else
! 465: \let\temp\argcheckspaces
! 466: \fi
! 467: % Put the space token in:
! 468: \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
! 469: }
! 470:
! 471: % If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
! 472: % to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
! 473: % We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
! 474: % just before passing the control to \argtorun.
! 475: % (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
! 476: % either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
! 477: % that a pair of braces would be stripped.
! 478: %
! 479: % But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
! 480: %
! 481: \def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}}
! 482:
! 483: % \parseargdef\foo{...}
! 484: % is roughly equivalent to
! 485: % \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
! 486: % \def\Xfoo#1{...}
! 487: %
! 488: % Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my
! 489: % favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03
! 490:
! 491: \def\parseargdef#1{%
! 492: \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
! 493: }
! 494: \def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
! 495: \def#2{\parsearg#1}%
! 496: \def#1##1%
! 497: }
! 498:
! 499: % Several utility definitions with active space:
! 500: {
! 501: \obeyspaces
! 502: \gdef\obeyedspace{ }
! 503:
! 504: % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
! 505: % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
! 506: % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
! 507: % should produce a line of output anyway.
! 508: %
! 509: \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
! 510:
! 511: % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
! 512: % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
! 513: % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
! 514: \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
! 515: }
! 516:
! 517:
! 518: \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
! 519:
! 520: % Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this:
! 521: %
! 522: % \envdef\foo{...}
! 523: % \def\Efoo{...}
! 524: %
! 525: % It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
! 526: % actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also
! 527: % defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
! 528: % whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be
! 529: % used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
! 530: %
! 531: % Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
! 532: % are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The
! 533: % implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
! 534: % special case.)
! 535:
! 536:
! 537: % At run-time, environments start with this:
! 538: \def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
! 539: % initialize
! 540: \let\thisenv\empty
! 541:
! 542: % ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
! 543: \long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
! 544: \def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
! 545:
! 546: % Check whether we're in the right environment:
! 547: \def\checkenv#1{%
! 548: \def\temp{#1}%
! 549: \ifx\thisenv\temp
! 550: \else
! 551: \badenverr
! 552: \fi
! 553: }
! 554:
! 555: % Environment mismatch, #1 expected:
! 556: \def\badenverr{%
! 557: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 558: \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
! 559: not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
! 560: }
! 561: \def\inenvironment#1{%
! 562: \ifx#1\empty
! 563: outside of any environment%
! 564: \else
! 565: in environment \expandafter\string#1%
! 566: \fi
! 567: }
! 568:
! 569: % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
! 570: % But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
! 571: %
! 572: \parseargdef\end{%
! 573: \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
! 574: \else
! 575: % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal.
! 576: \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
! 577: \csname E#1\endcsname
! 578: \endgroup
! 579: \fi
! 580: }
! 581:
! 582: \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
! 583:
! 584:
! 585: % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
! 586: % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
! 587: % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
! 588: % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
! 589: % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
! 590: {\catcode`@ = 11
! 591: % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
! 592: % if the definition is written into an index file.
! 593: \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
! 594: \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
! 595: }
! 596:
! 597: % @: forces normal size whitespace following.
! 598: \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
! 599:
! 600: % @* forces a line break.
! 601: \def\*{\unskip\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
! 602:
! 603: % @/ allows a line break.
! 604: \let\/=\allowbreak
! 605:
! 606: % @. is an end-of-sentence period.
! 607: \def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
! 608:
! 609: % @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
! 610: \def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
! 611:
! 612: % @? is an end-of-sentence query.
! 613: \def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
! 614:
! 615: % @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
! 616: %
! 617: \def\onword{on}
! 618: \def\offword{off}
! 619: %
! 620: \parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
! 621: \def\temp{#1}%
! 622: \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing
! 623: \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing
! 624: \else
! 625: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 626: \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on|off}%
! 627: \fi\fi
! 628: }
! 629:
! 630: % @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
! 631: % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
! 632: % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
! 633: \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
! 634:
! 635: % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
! 636: % it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
! 637: % to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
! 638: % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
! 639: % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
! 640: % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
! 641: % the text is small, which looks bad.
! 642: %
! 643: % Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can
! 644: % cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
! 645: % does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an
! 646: % explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The
! 647: % threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
! 648: % percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
! 649: %
! 650: \newbox\groupbox
! 651: \def\vfilllimit{0.7}
! 652: %
! 653: \envdef\group{%
! 654: \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
! 655: \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
! 656: \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
! 657: \fi
! 658: \startsavinginserts
! 659: %
! 660: \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
! 661: % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
! 662: % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
! 663: % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
! 664: % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
! 665: % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
! 666: % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
! 667: \comment
! 668: }
! 669: %
! 670: % The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
! 671: % \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
! 672: % \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
! 673: % above. But it's pretty close.
! 674: \def\Egroup{%
! 675: % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
! 676: % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
! 677: \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
! 678: \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
! 679: \egroup % End the \vtop.
! 680: % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
! 681: \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
! 682: % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
! 683: \dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
! 684: % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
! 685: % group, force a page break.
! 686: \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
! 687: \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
! 688: \page
! 689: \fi
! 690: \fi
! 691: \box\groupbox
! 692: \prevdepth = \dimen1
! 693: \checkinserts
! 694: }
! 695: %
! 696: % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
! 697: % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
! 698: %
! 699: \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
! 700: group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
! 701: where each line of input produces a line of output.}
! 702:
! 703: % @need space-in-mils
! 704: % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
! 705:
! 706: \newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
! 707:
! 708: \parseargdef\need{%
! 709: % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
! 710: % paragraph.
! 711: \par
! 712: %
! 713: % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
! 714: \dimen0 = #1\mil
! 715: \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
! 716: \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
! 717: \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
! 718: %
! 719: % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
! 720: % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
! 721: % And a page break here is fine.
! 722: \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
! 723: %
! 724: % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
! 725: % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the
! 726: % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
! 727: % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
! 728: % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999.
! 729: %
! 730: % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
! 731: % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
! 732: % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
! 733: % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
! 734: % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an
! 735: % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
! 736: % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
! 737: \penalty9999
! 738: %
! 739: % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
! 740: \kern -#1\mil
! 741: %
! 742: % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
! 743: \nobreak
! 744: \fi
! 745: }
! 746:
! 747: % @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
! 748:
! 749: \let\br = \par
! 750:
! 751: % @page forces the start of a new page.
! 752: %
! 753: \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
! 754:
! 755: % @exdent text....
! 756: % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
! 757:
! 758: % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
! 759: % That's how much \exdent should take out.
! 760: \newskip\exdentamount
! 761:
! 762: % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
! 763: \parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
! 764:
! 765: % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
! 766: \parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
! 767: \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
! 768:
! 769: % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
! 770: % paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
! 771: % class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. Not documented, written for gawk manual.
! 772: %
! 773: \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
! 774: \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
! 775: %
! 776: \def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
! 777: \nobreak
! 778: \kern-\strutdepth
! 779: \vtop to \strutdepth{%
! 780: \baselineskip=\strutdepth
! 781: \vss
! 782: % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
! 783: % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
! 784: \ifx#1l%
! 785: \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
! 786: \else
! 787: \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
! 788: \fi
! 789: \null
! 790: }%
! 791: }}
! 792: \def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
! 793: \def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
! 794: %
! 795: % @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
! 796: % (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
! 797: % else use TEXT for both).
! 798: %
! 799: \def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
! 800: \def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
! 801: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
! 802: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
! 803: \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts
! 804: \def\righttext{#2}%
! 805: \else
! 806: \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text
! 807: \def\righttext{#1}%
! 808: \fi
! 809: %
! 810: \ifodd\pageno
! 811: \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
! 812: \else
! 813: \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
! 814: \fi
! 815: \temp
! 816: }
! 817:
! 818: % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should
! 819: % surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the
! 820: % change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would
! 821: % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
! 822: % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). This command
! 823: % is not documented, not supported, and doesn't work.
! 824: %
! 825: \def\|{%
! 826: % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
! 827: \leavevmode
! 828: %
! 829: % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
! 830: \vadjust{%
! 831: % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
! 832: % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
! 833: \vskip-\baselineskip
! 834: %
! 835: % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So
! 836: % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
! 837: \llap{%
! 838: %
! 839: % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
! 840: \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
! 841: %
! 842: % This is the space between the bar and the text.
! 843: \hskip 12pt
! 844: }%
! 845: }%
! 846: }
! 847:
! 848: % @include FILE -- \input text of FILE.
! 849: %
! 850: \def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
! 851: \def\includezzz#1{%
! 852: \pushthisfilestack
! 853: \def\thisfile{#1}%
! 854: {%
! 855: \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE.
! 856: \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion
! 857: \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
! 858: \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @include of #1^^J}%
! 859: \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }%
! 860: %
! 861: % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes
! 862: % definitions, etc.
! 863: \expandafter
! 864: }\temp
! 865: \popthisfilestack
! 866: }
! 867: \def\filenamecatcodes{%
! 868: \catcode`\\=\other
! 869: \catcode`~=\other
! 870: \catcode`^=\other
! 871: \catcode`_=\other
! 872: \catcode`|=\other
! 873: \catcode`<=\other
! 874: \catcode`>=\other
! 875: \catcode`+=\other
! 876: \catcode`-=\other
! 877: \catcode`\`=\other
! 878: \catcode`\'=\other
! 879: }
! 880:
! 881: \def\pushthisfilestack{%
! 882: \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
! 883: }
! 884: \def\pushthisfilestackX{%
! 885: \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
! 886: }
! 887: \def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
! 888: \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
! 889: }
! 890:
! 891: \def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
! 892: \def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
! 893: the stack of filenames is empty.}}
! 894: %
! 895: \def\thisfile{}
! 896:
! 897: % @center line
! 898: % outputs that line, centered.
! 899: %
! 900: \parseargdef\center{%
! 901: \ifhmode
! 902: \let\centersub\centerH
! 903: \else
! 904: \let\centersub\centerV
! 905: \fi
! 906: \centersub{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
! 907: \let\centersub\relax % don't let the definition persist, just in case
! 908: }
! 909: \def\centerH#1{{%
! 910: \hfil\break
! 911: \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
! 912: \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
! 913: \line{#1}%
! 914: \break
! 915: }}
! 916: %
! 917: \newcount\centerpenalty
! 918: \def\centerV#1{%
! 919: % The idea here is the same as in \startdefun, \cartouche, etc.: if
! 920: % @center is the first thing after a section heading, we need to wipe
! 921: % out the negative parskip inserted by \sectionheading, but still
! 922: % prevent a page break here.
! 923: \centerpenalty = \lastpenalty
! 924: \ifnum\centerpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \fi
! 925: \ifnum\centerpenalty>9999 \penalty\centerpenalty \fi
! 926: \line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}%
! 927: }
! 928:
! 929: % @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
! 930: %
! 931: \parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
! 932:
! 933: % @comment ...line which is ignored...
! 934: % @c is the same as @comment
! 935: % @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
! 936: %
! 937: \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
! 938: \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
! 939: \commentxxx}
! 940: {\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
! 941: %
! 942: \let\c=\comment
! 943:
! 944: % @paragraphindent NCHARS
! 945: % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
! 946: % NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
! 947: % We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
! 948: %
! 949: \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
! 950: \def\noneword{none}
! 951: %
! 952: \parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
! 953: \def\temp{#1}%
! 954: \ifx\temp\asisword
! 955: \else
! 956: \ifx\temp\noneword
! 957: \defaultparindent = 0pt
! 958: \else
! 959: \defaultparindent = #1em
! 960: \fi
! 961: \fi
! 962: \parindent = \defaultparindent
! 963: }
! 964:
! 965: % @exampleindent NCHARS
! 966: % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
! 967: % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
! 968: % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
! 969: \parseargdef\exampleindent{%
! 970: \def\temp{#1}%
! 971: \ifx\temp\asisword
! 972: \else
! 973: \ifx\temp\noneword
! 974: \lispnarrowing = 0pt
! 975: \else
! 976: \lispnarrowing = #1em
! 977: \fi
! 978: \fi
! 979: }
! 980:
! 981: % @firstparagraphindent WORD
! 982: % If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
! 983: % after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
! 984: % paragraphs.
! 985: %
! 986: % The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
! 987: % \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
! 988: % We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
! 989: % By default, we suppress indentation.
! 990: %
! 991: \def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
! 992: \def\insertword{insert}
! 993: %
! 994: \parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
! 995: \def\temp{#1}%
! 996: \ifx\temp\noneword
! 997: \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
! 998: \else\ifx\temp\insertword
! 999: \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
! 1000: \else
! 1001: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 1002: \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
! 1003: \fi\fi
! 1004: }
! 1005:
! 1006: % Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to
! 1007: % \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
! 1008: %
! 1009: % We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
! 1010: % paragraph.
! 1011: %
! 1012: \gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
! 1013: \gdef\indent{%
! 1014: \restorefirstparagraphindent
! 1015: \indent
! 1016: }%
! 1017: \gdef\noindent{%
! 1018: \restorefirstparagraphindent
! 1019: \noindent
! 1020: }%
! 1021: \global\everypar = {%
! 1022: \kern -\parindent
! 1023: \restorefirstparagraphindent
! 1024: }%
! 1025: }
! 1026:
! 1027: \gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
! 1028: \global \let \indent = \ptexindent
! 1029: \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent
! 1030: \global \everypar = {}%
! 1031: }
! 1032:
! 1033:
! 1034: % @refill is a no-op.
! 1035: \let\refill=\relax
! 1036:
! 1037: % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
! 1038: % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
! 1039: % This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
! 1040: %
! 1041: \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
! 1042: \let\novalidate = \linksfalse
! 1043:
! 1044: % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
! 1045: % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
! 1046: % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
! 1047: \def\setfilename{%
! 1048: \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
! 1049: \iflinks
! 1050: \tryauxfile
! 1051: % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
! 1052: \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
! 1053: \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
! 1054: \openindices
! 1055: \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
! 1056: %
! 1057: % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
! 1058: % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
! 1059: \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
! 1060: \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
! 1061: \closein 1
! 1062: %
! 1063: \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
! 1064: }
! 1065:
! 1066: % Called from \setfilename.
! 1067: %
! 1068: \def\openindices{%
! 1069: \newindex{cp}%
! 1070: \newcodeindex{fn}%
! 1071: \newcodeindex{vr}%
! 1072: \newcodeindex{tp}%
! 1073: \newcodeindex{ky}%
! 1074: \newcodeindex{pg}%
! 1075: }
! 1076:
! 1077: % @bye.
! 1078: \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
! 1079:
! 1080:
! 1081: \message{pdf,}
! 1082: % adobe `portable' document format
! 1083: \newcount\tempnum
! 1084: \newcount\lnkcount
! 1085: \newtoks\filename
! 1086: \newcount\filenamelength
! 1087: \newcount\pgn
! 1088: \newtoks\toksA
! 1089: \newtoks\toksB
! 1090: \newtoks\toksC
! 1091: \newtoks\toksD
! 1092: \newbox\boxA
! 1093: \newcount\countA
! 1094: \newif\ifpdf
! 1095: \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
! 1096:
! 1097: % when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
! 1098: % can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as being undefined.
! 1099: \ifx\pdfoutput\thisisundefined
! 1100: \else
! 1101: \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
! 1102: \else
! 1103: \ifcase\pdfoutput
! 1104: \else
! 1105: \pdftrue
! 1106: \fi
! 1107: \fi
! 1108: \fi
! 1109:
! 1110: % PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets,
! 1111: % for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to
! 1112: % double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
! 1113: % interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good.
! 1114: %
! 1115: % See http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html and
! 1116: % related messages. The final outcome is that it is up to the TeX user
! 1117: % to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
! 1118: % that's what we do. pdftex 1.30.0 (ca.2005) introduced a primitive to
! 1119: % do this reliably, so we use it.
! 1120:
! 1121: % #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements,
! 1122: % which we \xdef.
! 1123: \def\txiescapepdf#1{%
! 1124: \ifx\pdfescapestring\thisisundefined
! 1125: % No primitive available; should we give a warning or log?
! 1126: % Many times it won't matter.
! 1127: \else
! 1128: % The expandable \pdfescapestring primitive escapes parentheses,
! 1129: % backslashes, and other special chars.
! 1130: \xdef#1{\pdfescapestring{#1}}%
! 1131: \fi
! 1132: }
! 1133:
! 1134: \newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images
! 1135: with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot
! 1136: be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI
! 1137: output) for that.)}
! 1138:
! 1139: \ifpdf
! 1140: %
! 1141: % Color manipulation macros based on pdfcolor.tex,
! 1142: % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a
! 1143: % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead
! 1144: % of actual black.
! 1145: \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12}
! 1146: \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0}
! 1147: %
! 1148: % k sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.);
! 1149: % K sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s).
! 1150: \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg #1 RG}}
! 1151: %
! 1152: % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly,
! 1153: % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore.
! 1154: \def\setcolor#1{%
! 1155: \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}%
! 1156: \domark
! 1157: \pdfsetcolor{#1}%
! 1158: }
! 1159: %
! 1160: \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack}
! 1161: \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}
! 1162: \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor}
! 1163: \def\lastcolordefs{}
! 1164: %
! 1165: \def\makefootline{%
! 1166: \baselineskip24pt
! 1167: \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}%
! 1168: }
! 1169: %
! 1170: \def\makeheadline{%
! 1171: \vbox to 0pt{%
! 1172: \vskip-22.5pt
! 1173: \line{%
! 1174: \vbox to8.5pt{}%
! 1175: % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks.
! 1176: \getcolormarks
! 1177: % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color.
! 1178: \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}%
! 1179: }%
! 1180: \vss
! 1181: }%
! 1182: \nointerlineskip
! 1183: }
! 1184: %
! 1185: %
! 1186: \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}
! 1187: %
! 1188: % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
! 1189: \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
! 1190: \def\pdfimagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
! 1191: \def\pdfimageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
! 1192: %
! 1193: % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among
! 1194: % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if
! 1195: % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a
! 1196: % bitmap.
! 1197: \let\pdfimgext=\empty
! 1198: \begingroup
! 1199: \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
! 1200: \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
! 1201: \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
! 1202: \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
! 1203: \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
! 1204: \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
! 1205: \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp
! 1206: \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}%
! 1207: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}%
! 1208: \fi
! 1209: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}%
! 1210: \fi
! 1211: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}%
! 1212: \fi
! 1213: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}%
! 1214: \fi
! 1215: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}%
! 1216: \fi
! 1217: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}%
! 1218: \fi
! 1219: \closein 1
! 1220: \endgroup
! 1221: %
! 1222: % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is
! 1223: % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
! 1224: \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
! 1225: \immediate\pdfimage
! 1226: \else
! 1227: \immediate\pdfximage
! 1228: \fi
! 1229: \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \pdfimagewidth \fi
! 1230: \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \pdfimageheight \fi
! 1231: \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
! 1232: #1.\pdfimgext
! 1233: \else
! 1234: {#1.\pdfimgext}%
! 1235: \fi
! 1236: \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
! 1237: \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
! 1238: \fi}
! 1239: %
! 1240: \def\pdfmkdest#1{{%
! 1241: % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
! 1242: % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
! 1243: \indexnofonts
! 1244: \turnoffactive
! 1245: \makevalueexpandable
! 1246: \def\pdfdestname{#1}%
! 1247: \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname
! 1248: \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}%
! 1249: }}
! 1250: %
! 1251: % used to mark target names; must be expandable.
! 1252: \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
! 1253: %
! 1254: % by default, use a color that is dark enough to print on paper as
! 1255: % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing.
! 1256: \def\urlcolor{\rgbDarkRed}
! 1257: \def\linkcolor{\rgbDarkRed}
! 1258: \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink}
! 1259: %
! 1260: % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
! 1261: % come from Petr Olsak
! 1262: \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
! 1263: \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
! 1264: \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
! 1265: \advance\tempnum by 1
! 1266: \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
! 1267: %
! 1268: % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
! 1269: % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number
! 1270: % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text,
! 1271: % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
! 1272: % #4 is the page number
! 1273: %
! 1274: \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
! 1275: % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
! 1276: % page number. We could generate a destination for the section
! 1277: % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
! 1278: % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
! 1279: \edef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
! 1280: \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty
! 1281: \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}%
! 1282: \else
! 1283: \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinedest
! 1284: \fi
! 1285: %
! 1286: % Also escape PDF chars in the display string.
! 1287: \edef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
! 1288: \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinetext
! 1289: %
! 1290: \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
! 1291: }
! 1292: %
! 1293: \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
! 1294: \begingroup
! 1295: % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
! 1296: \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines
! 1297: \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1298: \def\thischapnum{##2}%
! 1299: \def\thissecnum{0}%
! 1300: \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
! 1301: }%
! 1302: \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1303: \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
! 1304: \def\thissecnum{##2}%
! 1305: \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
! 1306: }%
! 1307: \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1308: \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
! 1309: \def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
! 1310: }%
! 1311: \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1312: \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
! 1313: }%
! 1314: \def\thischapnum{0}%
! 1315: \def\thissecnum{0}%
! 1316: \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
! 1317: %
! 1318: % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
! 1319: % al. a second time, below.
! 1320: \def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
! 1321: \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
! 1322: \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
! 1323: \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
! 1324: \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
! 1325: \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
! 1326: \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
! 1327: \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
! 1328: \readdatafile{toc}%
! 1329: %
! 1330: % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
! 1331: % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
! 1332: % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
! 1333: %
! 1334: % We use the node names as the destinations.
! 1335: \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1336: \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
! 1337: \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1338: \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
! 1339: \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1340: \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
! 1341: \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
! 1342: \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
! 1343: %
! 1344: % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
! 1345: % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters,
! 1346: % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from
! 1347: % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from
! 1348: % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
! 1349: %
! 1350: % TODO this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
! 1351: % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Too
! 1352: % much work for too little return. Just use the ASCII equivalents
! 1353: % we use for the index sort strings.
! 1354: %
! 1355: \indexnofonts
! 1356: \setupdatafile
! 1357: % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike
! 1358: % Texinfo index files. So set that up.
! 1359: \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}%
! 1360: \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}%
! 1361: \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
! 1362: \input \tocreadfilename
! 1363: \endgroup
! 1364: }
! 1365: {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2
! 1366: \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other
! 1367: \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]%
! 1368: \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]%
! 1369: ]
! 1370: %
! 1371: \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
! 1372: \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
! 1373: \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
! 1374: \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
! 1375: \advance\filenamelength by 1
! 1376: \fi
! 1377: \nextsp}
! 1378: \def\getfilename#1{%
! 1379: \filenamelength=0
! 1380: % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get
! 1381: % snagged on things like "@value{foo}".
! 1382: \edef\temp{#1}%
! 1383: \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax
! 1384: }
! 1385: \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
! 1386: \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
! 1387: \else
! 1388: \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
! 1389: \fi
! 1390: % make a live url in pdf output.
! 1391: \def\pdfurl#1{%
! 1392: \begingroup
! 1393: % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
! 1394: % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
! 1395: % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
! 1396: % people have actually reported a problem with.
! 1397: %
! 1398: \normalturnoffactive
! 1399: \def\@{@}%
! 1400: \let\/=\empty
! 1401: \makevalueexpandable
! 1402: % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just
! 1403: % special-casing \var here?
! 1404: \def\var##1{##1}%
! 1405: %
! 1406: \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}%
! 1407: \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
! 1408: user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
! 1409: \endgroup}
! 1410: \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
! 1411: \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
! 1412: \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
! 1413: \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
! 1414: \def\maketoks{%
! 1415: \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
! 1416: \ifx\first0\adn0
! 1417: \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
! 1418: \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
! 1419: \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
! 1420: \else
! 1421: \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
! 1422: \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
! 1423: \let\next=\maketoks
! 1424: \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
! 1425: \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
! 1426: \fi
! 1427: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
! 1428: \next}
! 1429: \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
! 1430: {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
! 1431: \def\pdflink#1{%
! 1432: \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
! 1433: \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink}
! 1434: \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
! 1435: \else
! 1436: % non-pdf mode
! 1437: \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
! 1438: \let\pdfurl = \gobble
! 1439: \let\endlink = \relax
! 1440: \let\setcolor = \gobble
! 1441: \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble
! 1442: \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
! 1443: \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
! 1444:
! 1445:
! 1446: \message{fonts,}
! 1447:
! 1448: % Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
! 1449: % For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
! 1450: % italics, not bold italics.
! 1451: %
! 1452: \def\setfontstyle#1{%
! 1453: \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
! 1454: \csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font
! 1455: }
! 1456:
! 1457: % Select #1 fonts with the current style.
! 1458: %
! 1459: \def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname}
! 1460:
! 1461: \def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
! 1462: \def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
! 1463: \def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
! 1464: \def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
! 1465: \def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
! 1466:
! 1467: % Unfortunately, we have to override this for titles and the like, since
! 1468: % in those cases "rm" is bold. Sigh.
! 1469: \def\rmisbold{\rm\def\curfontstyle{bf}}
! 1470:
! 1471: % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
! 1472: % So we set up a \sf.
! 1473: \newfam\sffam
! 1474: \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
! 1475: \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
! 1476:
! 1477: % We don't need math for this font style.
! 1478: \def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
! 1479:
! 1480:
! 1481: % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
! 1482: % correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
! 1483: % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
! 1484: %
! 1485: \def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
! 1486: \def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
! 1487: \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
! 1488: %
! 1489: % can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this.
! 1490: \def\baselinefactor{1}
! 1491: %
! 1492: \newdimen\textleading
! 1493: \def\setleading#1{%
! 1494: \dimen0 = #1\relax
! 1495: \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0
! 1496: \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
! 1497: \normalbaselines
! 1498: \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
! 1499: \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
! 1500: depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
! 1501: }%
! 1502: }
! 1503:
! 1504: % PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap.
! 1505: %
! 1506: % do nothing with this by default.
! 1507: \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble
! 1508: \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble
! 1509: \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble
! 1510:
! 1511: % if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps.
! 1512: % (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run
! 1513: % older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.)
! 1514: \ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\thisisundefined \else
! 1515: \begingroup
! 1516: \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
! 1517: \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
! 1518: %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
! 1519: %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
! 1520: %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0)
! 1521: %%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0)
! 1522: %%Version: 1.000
! 1523: %%EndComments
! 1524: /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
! 1525: 12 dict begin
! 1526: begincmap
! 1527: /CIDSystemInfo
! 1528: << /Registry (TeX)
! 1529: /Ordering (OT1)
! 1530: /Supplement 0
! 1531: >> def
! 1532: /CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def
! 1533: /CMapType 2 def
! 1534: 1 begincodespacerange
! 1535: <00> <7F>
! 1536: endcodespacerange
! 1537: 8 beginbfrange
! 1538: <00> <01> <0393>
! 1539: <09> <0A> <03A8>
! 1540: <23> <26> <0023>
! 1541: <28> <3B> <0028>
! 1542: <3F> <5B> <003F>
! 1543: <5D> <5E> <005D>
! 1544: <61> <7A> <0061>
! 1545: <7B> <7C> <2013>
! 1546: endbfrange
! 1547: 40 beginbfchar
! 1548: <02> <0398>
! 1549: <03> <039B>
! 1550: <04> <039E>
! 1551: <05> <03A0>
! 1552: <06> <03A3>
! 1553: <07> <03D2>
! 1554: <08> <03A6>
! 1555: <0B> <00660066>
! 1556: <0C> <00660069>
! 1557: <0D> <0066006C>
! 1558: <0E> <006600660069>
! 1559: <0F> <00660066006C>
! 1560: <10> <0131>
! 1561: <11> <0237>
! 1562: <12> <0060>
! 1563: <13> <00B4>
! 1564: <14> <02C7>
! 1565: <15> <02D8>
! 1566: <16> <00AF>
! 1567: <17> <02DA>
! 1568: <18> <00B8>
! 1569: <19> <00DF>
! 1570: <1A> <00E6>
! 1571: <1B> <0153>
! 1572: <1C> <00F8>
! 1573: <1D> <00C6>
! 1574: <1E> <0152>
! 1575: <1F> <00D8>
! 1576: <21> <0021>
! 1577: <22> <201D>
! 1578: <27> <2019>
! 1579: <3C> <00A1>
! 1580: <3D> <003D>
! 1581: <3E> <00BF>
! 1582: <5C> <201C>
! 1583: <5F> <02D9>
! 1584: <60> <2018>
! 1585: <7D> <02DD>
! 1586: <7E> <007E>
! 1587: <7F> <00A8>
! 1588: endbfchar
! 1589: endcmap
! 1590: CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
! 1591: end
! 1592: end
! 1593: %%EndResource
! 1594: %%EOF
! 1595: }\endgroup
! 1596: \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{%
! 1597: \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
! 1598: }%
! 1599: %
! 1600: % \cmapOT1IT
! 1601: \begingroup
! 1602: \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
! 1603: \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
! 1604: %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
! 1605: %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
! 1606: %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0)
! 1607: %%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0)
! 1608: %%Version: 1.000
! 1609: %%EndComments
! 1610: /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
! 1611: 12 dict begin
! 1612: begincmap
! 1613: /CIDSystemInfo
! 1614: << /Registry (TeX)
! 1615: /Ordering (OT1IT)
! 1616: /Supplement 0
! 1617: >> def
! 1618: /CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def
! 1619: /CMapType 2 def
! 1620: 1 begincodespacerange
! 1621: <00> <7F>
! 1622: endcodespacerange
! 1623: 8 beginbfrange
! 1624: <00> <01> <0393>
! 1625: <09> <0A> <03A8>
! 1626: <25> <26> <0025>
! 1627: <28> <3B> <0028>
! 1628: <3F> <5B> <003F>
! 1629: <5D> <5E> <005D>
! 1630: <61> <7A> <0061>
! 1631: <7B> <7C> <2013>
! 1632: endbfrange
! 1633: 42 beginbfchar
! 1634: <02> <0398>
! 1635: <03> <039B>
! 1636: <04> <039E>
! 1637: <05> <03A0>
! 1638: <06> <03A3>
! 1639: <07> <03D2>
! 1640: <08> <03A6>
! 1641: <0B> <00660066>
! 1642: <0C> <00660069>
! 1643: <0D> <0066006C>
! 1644: <0E> <006600660069>
! 1645: <0F> <00660066006C>
! 1646: <10> <0131>
! 1647: <11> <0237>
! 1648: <12> <0060>
! 1649: <13> <00B4>
! 1650: <14> <02C7>
! 1651: <15> <02D8>
! 1652: <16> <00AF>
! 1653: <17> <02DA>
! 1654: <18> <00B8>
! 1655: <19> <00DF>
! 1656: <1A> <00E6>
! 1657: <1B> <0153>
! 1658: <1C> <00F8>
! 1659: <1D> <00C6>
! 1660: <1E> <0152>
! 1661: <1F> <00D8>
! 1662: <21> <0021>
! 1663: <22> <201D>
! 1664: <23> <0023>
! 1665: <24> <00A3>
! 1666: <27> <2019>
! 1667: <3C> <00A1>
! 1668: <3D> <003D>
! 1669: <3E> <00BF>
! 1670: <5C> <201C>
! 1671: <5F> <02D9>
! 1672: <60> <2018>
! 1673: <7D> <02DD>
! 1674: <7E> <007E>
! 1675: <7F> <00A8>
! 1676: endbfchar
! 1677: endcmap
! 1678: CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
! 1679: end
! 1680: end
! 1681: %%EndResource
! 1682: %%EOF
! 1683: }\endgroup
! 1684: \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{%
! 1685: \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
! 1686: }%
! 1687: %
! 1688: % \cmapOT1TT
! 1689: \begingroup
! 1690: \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
! 1691: \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
! 1692: %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
! 1693: %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
! 1694: %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0)
! 1695: %%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0)
! 1696: %%Version: 1.000
! 1697: %%EndComments
! 1698: /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
! 1699: 12 dict begin
! 1700: begincmap
! 1701: /CIDSystemInfo
! 1702: << /Registry (TeX)
! 1703: /Ordering (OT1TT)
! 1704: /Supplement 0
! 1705: >> def
! 1706: /CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def
! 1707: /CMapType 2 def
! 1708: 1 begincodespacerange
! 1709: <00> <7F>
! 1710: endcodespacerange
! 1711: 5 beginbfrange
! 1712: <00> <01> <0393>
! 1713: <09> <0A> <03A8>
! 1714: <21> <26> <0021>
! 1715: <28> <5F> <0028>
! 1716: <61> <7E> <0061>
! 1717: endbfrange
! 1718: 32 beginbfchar
! 1719: <02> <0398>
! 1720: <03> <039B>
! 1721: <04> <039E>
! 1722: <05> <03A0>
! 1723: <06> <03A3>
! 1724: <07> <03D2>
! 1725: <08> <03A6>
! 1726: <0B> <2191>
! 1727: <0C> <2193>
! 1728: <0D> <0027>
! 1729: <0E> <00A1>
! 1730: <0F> <00BF>
! 1731: <10> <0131>
! 1732: <11> <0237>
! 1733: <12> <0060>
! 1734: <13> <00B4>
! 1735: <14> <02C7>
! 1736: <15> <02D8>
! 1737: <16> <00AF>
! 1738: <17> <02DA>
! 1739: <18> <00B8>
! 1740: <19> <00DF>
! 1741: <1A> <00E6>
! 1742: <1B> <0153>
! 1743: <1C> <00F8>
! 1744: <1D> <00C6>
! 1745: <1E> <0152>
! 1746: <1F> <00D8>
! 1747: <20> <2423>
! 1748: <27> <2019>
! 1749: <60> <2018>
! 1750: <7F> <00A8>
! 1751: endbfchar
! 1752: endcmap
! 1753: CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
! 1754: end
! 1755: end
! 1756: %%EndResource
! 1757: %%EOF
! 1758: }\endgroup
! 1759: \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{%
! 1760: \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
! 1761: }%
! 1762: \fi\fi
! 1763:
! 1764:
! 1765: % Set the font macro #1 to the font named \fontprefix#2.
! 1766: % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap
! 1767: % encoding (only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, or empty to omit).
! 1768: % Example:
! 1769: % #1 = \textrm
! 1770: % #2 = \rmshape
! 1771: % #3 = 10
! 1772: % #4 = \mainmagstep
! 1773: % #5 = OT1
! 1774: %
! 1775: \def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{%
! 1776: \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4
! 1777: \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1%
! 1778: }
! 1779: % This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty.
! 1780: \let\cmap\gobble
! 1781: %
! 1782: % (end of cmaps)
! 1783:
! 1784: % Use cm as the default font prefix.
! 1785: % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
! 1786: % before you read in texinfo.tex.
! 1787: \ifx\fontprefix\thisisundefined
! 1788: \def\fontprefix{cm}
! 1789: \fi
! 1790: % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
! 1791: \def\rmshape{r}
! 1792: \def\rmbshape{bx} % where the normal face is bold
! 1793: \def\bfshape{b}
! 1794: \def\bxshape{bx}
! 1795: \def\ttshape{tt}
! 1796: \def\ttbshape{tt}
! 1797: \def\ttslshape{sltt}
! 1798: \def\itshape{ti}
! 1799: \def\itbshape{bxti}
! 1800: \def\slshape{sl}
! 1801: \def\slbshape{bxsl}
! 1802: \def\sfshape{ss}
! 1803: \def\sfbshape{ss}
! 1804: \def\scshape{csc}
! 1805: \def\scbshape{csc}
! 1806:
! 1807: % Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. (The default in Texinfo.)
! 1808: %
! 1809: \def\definetextfontsizexi{%
! 1810: % Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
! 1811: \def\textnominalsize{11pt}
! 1812: \edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
! 1813: \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
! 1814: \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
! 1815: \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
! 1816: \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
! 1817: \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
! 1818: \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
! 1819: \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
! 1820: \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
! 1821: \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
! 1822: \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
! 1823: \def\textecsize{1095}
! 1824:
! 1825: % A few fonts for @defun names and args.
! 1826: \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
! 1827: \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
! 1828: \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
! 1829: \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
! 1830:
! 1831: % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
! 1832: \def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
! 1833: \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
! 1834: \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 1835: \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
! 1836: \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
! 1837: \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
! 1838: \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
! 1839: \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
! 1840: \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
! 1841: \font\smalli=cmmi9
! 1842: \font\smallsy=cmsy9
! 1843: \def\smallecsize{0900}
! 1844:
! 1845: % Fonts for small examples (8pt).
! 1846: \def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
! 1847: \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
! 1848: \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 1849: \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
! 1850: \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
! 1851: \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
! 1852: \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
! 1853: \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
! 1854: \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
! 1855: \font\smalleri=cmmi8
! 1856: \font\smallersy=cmsy8
! 1857: \def\smallerecsize{0800}
! 1858:
! 1859: % Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
! 1860: \def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
! 1861: \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
! 1862: \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
! 1863: \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
! 1864: \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
! 1865: \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
! 1866: \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
! 1867: \let\titlebf=\titlerm
! 1868: \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
! 1869: \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
! 1870: \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
! 1871: \def\titleecsize{2074}
! 1872:
! 1873: % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
! 1874: \def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
! 1875: \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1}
! 1876: \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT}
! 1877: \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
! 1878: \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
! 1879: \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
! 1880: \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1}
! 1881: \let\chapbf=\chaprm
! 1882: \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
! 1883: \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
! 1884: \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
! 1885: \def\chapecsize{1728}
! 1886:
! 1887: % Section fonts (14.4pt).
! 1888: \def\secnominalsize{14pt}
! 1889: \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
! 1890: \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
! 1891: \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
! 1892: \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
! 1893: \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
! 1894: \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
! 1895: \let\secbf\secrm
! 1896: \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
! 1897: \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
! 1898: \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
! 1899: \def\sececsize{1440}
! 1900:
! 1901: % Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
! 1902: \def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
! 1903: \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
! 1904: \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT}
! 1905: \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
! 1906: \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
! 1907: \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT}
! 1908: \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
! 1909: \let\ssecbf\ssecrm
! 1910: \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
! 1911: \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
! 1912: \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
! 1913: \def\ssececsize{1200}
! 1914:
! 1915: % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt).
! 1916: \def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
! 1917: \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
! 1918: \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 1919: \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
! 1920: \setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
! 1921: \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
! 1922: \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
! 1923: \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
! 1924: \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 1925: \font\reducedi=cmmi10
! 1926: \font\reducedsy=cmsy10
! 1927: \def\reducedecsize{1000}
! 1928:
! 1929: \textleading = 13.2pt % line spacing for 11pt CM
! 1930: \textfonts % reset the current fonts
! 1931: \rm
! 1932: } % end of 11pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizexi
! 1933:
! 1934:
! 1935: % Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with
! 1936: % section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU
! 1937: % Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the
! 1938: % future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt.
! 1939: %
! 1940: \def\definetextfontsizex{%
! 1941: % Text fonts (10pt).
! 1942: \def\textnominalsize{10pt}
! 1943: \edef\mainmagstep{1000}
! 1944: \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
! 1945: \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
! 1946: \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
! 1947: \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
! 1948: \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
! 1949: \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
! 1950: \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
! 1951: \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
! 1952: \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
! 1953: \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
! 1954: \def\textecsize{1000}
! 1955:
! 1956: % A few fonts for @defun names and args.
! 1957: \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
! 1958: \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
! 1959: \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
! 1960: \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
! 1961:
! 1962: % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
! 1963: \def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
! 1964: \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
! 1965: \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 1966: \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
! 1967: \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
! 1968: \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
! 1969: \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
! 1970: \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
! 1971: \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
! 1972: \font\smalli=cmmi9
! 1973: \font\smallsy=cmsy9
! 1974: \def\smallecsize{0900}
! 1975:
! 1976: % Fonts for small examples (8pt).
! 1977: \def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
! 1978: \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
! 1979: \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 1980: \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
! 1981: \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
! 1982: \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
! 1983: \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
! 1984: \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
! 1985: \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
! 1986: \font\smalleri=cmmi8
! 1987: \font\smallersy=cmsy8
! 1988: \def\smallerecsize{0800}
! 1989:
! 1990: % Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
! 1991: \def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
! 1992: \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
! 1993: \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
! 1994: \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
! 1995: \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
! 1996: \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
! 1997: \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
! 1998: \let\titlebf=\titlerm
! 1999: \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
! 2000: \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
! 2001: \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
! 2002: \def\titleecsize{2074}
! 2003:
! 2004: % Chapter fonts (14.4pt).
! 2005: \def\chapnominalsize{14pt}
! 2006: \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
! 2007: \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
! 2008: \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
! 2009: \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
! 2010: \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
! 2011: \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
! 2012: \let\chapbf\chaprm
! 2013: \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
! 2014: \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
! 2015: \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
! 2016: \def\chapecsize{1440}
! 2017:
! 2018: % Section fonts (12pt).
! 2019: \def\secnominalsize{12pt}
! 2020: \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
! 2021: \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT}
! 2022: \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
! 2023: \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 2024: \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
! 2025: \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
! 2026: \let\secbf\secrm
! 2027: \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
! 2028: \font\seci=cmmi12
! 2029: \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
! 2030: \def\sececsize{1200}
! 2031:
! 2032: % Subsection fonts (10pt).
! 2033: \def\ssecnominalsize{10pt}
! 2034: \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
! 2035: \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
! 2036: \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
! 2037: \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 2038: \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 2039: \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
! 2040: \let\ssecbf\ssecrm
! 2041: \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
! 2042: \font\sseci=cmmi10
! 2043: \font\ssecsy=cmsy10
! 2044: \def\ssececsize{1000}
! 2045:
! 2046: % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt).
! 2047: \def\reducednominalsize{9pt}
! 2048: \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
! 2049: \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 2050: \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
! 2051: \setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
! 2052: \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
! 2053: \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
! 2054: \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
! 2055: \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
! 2056: \font\reducedi=cmmi9
! 2057: \font\reducedsy=cmsy9
! 2058: \def\reducedecsize{0900}
! 2059:
! 2060: \divide\parskip by 2 % reduce space between paragraphs
! 2061: \textleading = 12pt % line spacing for 10pt CM
! 2062: \textfonts % reset the current fonts
! 2063: \rm
! 2064: } % end of 10pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizex
! 2065:
! 2066:
! 2067: % We provide the user-level command
! 2068: % @fonttextsize 10
! 2069: % (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed.
! 2070: %
! 2071: \def\xiword{11}
! 2072: \def\xword{10}
! 2073: \def\xwordpt{10pt}
! 2074: %
! 2075: \parseargdef\fonttextsize{%
! 2076: \def\textsizearg{#1}%
! 2077: %\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}%
! 2078: %
! 2079: % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since
! 2080: % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless.
! 2081: %
! 2082: \begingroup \globaldefs=1
! 2083: \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex
! 2084: \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi
! 2085: \else
! 2086: \errhelp=\EMsimple
! 2087: \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'}
! 2088: \fi\fi
! 2089: \endgroup
! 2090: }
! 2091:
! 2092:
! 2093: % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
! 2094: % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since
! 2095: % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
! 2096: % in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
! 2097: % \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
! 2098: %
! 2099: \def\resetmathfonts{%
! 2100: \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
! 2101: \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
! 2102: \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
! 2103: }
! 2104:
! 2105: % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
! 2106: % of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the
! 2107: % current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire
! 2108: % \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
! 2109: %
! 2110: % Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
! 2111: % and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in
! 2112: % the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
! 2113: %
! 2114: % This all needs generalizing, badly.
! 2115: %
! 2116: \def\textfonts{%
! 2117: \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
! 2118: \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
! 2119: \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy
! 2120: \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
! 2121: \def\curfontsize{text}%
! 2122: \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
! 2123: \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
! 2124: \def\titlefonts{%
! 2125: \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
! 2126: \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
! 2127: \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
! 2128: \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
! 2129: \def\curfontsize{title}%
! 2130: \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}%
! 2131: \resetmathfonts \setleading{27pt}}
! 2132: \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}}
! 2133: \def\chapfonts{%
! 2134: \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
! 2135: \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
! 2136: \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy
! 2137: \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
! 2138: \def\curfontsize{chap}%
! 2139: \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}%
! 2140: \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
! 2141: \def\secfonts{%
! 2142: \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
! 2143: \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
! 2144: \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy
! 2145: \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
! 2146: \def\curfontsize{sec}%
! 2147: \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}%
! 2148: \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
! 2149: \def\subsecfonts{%
! 2150: \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
! 2151: \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
! 2152: \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy
! 2153: \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
! 2154: \def\curfontsize{ssec}%
! 2155: \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}%
! 2156: \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
! 2157: \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts
! 2158: \def\reducedfonts{%
! 2159: \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl
! 2160: \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc
! 2161: \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy
! 2162: \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl
! 2163: \def\curfontsize{reduced}%
! 2164: \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
! 2165: \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
! 2166: \def\smallfonts{%
! 2167: \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
! 2168: \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
! 2169: \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
! 2170: \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
! 2171: \def\curfontsize{small}%
! 2172: \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
! 2173: \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
! 2174: \def\smallerfonts{%
! 2175: \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
! 2176: \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
! 2177: \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
! 2178: \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
! 2179: \def\curfontsize{smaller}%
! 2180: \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
! 2181: \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
! 2182:
! 2183: % Fonts for short table of contents.
! 2184: \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
! 2185: \setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12
! 2186: \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
! 2187: \setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 2188:
! 2189: % Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
! 2190: \def\angleleft{$\langle$}
! 2191: \def\angleright{$\rangle$}
! 2192:
! 2193: % Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
! 2194: \let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
! 2195:
! 2196: % About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
! 2197: % can fit this many characters:
! 2198: % 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69
! 2199: % If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
! 2200: % 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77
! 2201: % For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
! 2202: % the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt.
! 2203: %
! 2204: % By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
! 2205: % 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58
! 2206: % --karl, 24jan03.
! 2207:
! 2208: % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
! 2209: %
! 2210: \definetextfontsizexi
! 2211:
! 2212:
! 2213: \message{markup,}
! 2214:
! 2215: % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the
! 2216: % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
! 2217: % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
! 2218: % this property, we can check that font parameter.
! 2219: %
! 2220: \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
! 2221:
! 2222: % Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will
! 2223: % define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes.
! 2224: % \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost
! 2225: % style and the set of \ifmarkupSTYLE switches for all styles
! 2226: % currently in effect.
! 2227: \newif\ifmarkupvar
! 2228: \newif\ifmarkupsamp
! 2229: \newif\ifmarkupkey
! 2230: %\newif\ifmarkupfile % @file == @samp.
! 2231: %\newif\ifmarkupoption % @option == @samp.
! 2232: \newif\ifmarkupcode
! 2233: \newif\ifmarkupkbd
! 2234: %\newif\ifmarkupenv % @env == @code.
! 2235: %\newif\ifmarkupcommand % @command == @code.
! 2236: \newif\ifmarkuptex % @tex (and part of @math, for now).
! 2237: \newif\ifmarkupexample
! 2238: \newif\ifmarkupverb
! 2239: \newif\ifmarkupverbatim
! 2240:
! 2241: \let\currentmarkupstyle\empty
! 2242:
! 2243: \def\setupmarkupstyle#1{%
! 2244: \csname markup#1true\endcsname
! 2245: \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}%
! 2246: \markupstylesetup
! 2247: }
! 2248:
! 2249: \let\markupstylesetup\empty
! 2250:
! 2251: \def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{%
! 2252: \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup
! 2253: \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}%
! 2254: \def#1%
! 2255: }
! 2256:
! 2257: % Markup style setup for left and right quotes.
! 2258: \defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{%
! 2259: \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp
! 2260: \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
! 2261: \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi
! 2262: }
! 2263:
! 2264: \defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{%
! 2265: \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp
! 2266: \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
! 2267: \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi
! 2268: }
! 2269:
! 2270: {
! 2271: \catcode`\'=\active
! 2272: \catcode`\`=\active
! 2273:
! 2274: \gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq}
! 2275: \gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq}
! 2276:
! 2277: \gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft}
! 2278: \gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright}
! 2279: }
! 2280:
! 2281: \let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft
! 2282: \let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright
! 2283: %
! 2284: \let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft
! 2285: \let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright
! 2286: %
! 2287: \let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetcodequoteleft
! 2288: \let\markupsetuprqkbd \markupsetcodequoteright
! 2289: %
! 2290: \let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetcodequoteleft
! 2291: \let\markupsetuprqsamp \markupsetcodequoteright
! 2292: %
! 2293: \let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft
! 2294: \let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright
! 2295: %
! 2296: \let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft
! 2297: \let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright
! 2298:
! 2299: % Allow an option to not use regular directed right quote/apostrophe
! 2300: % (char 0x27), but instead the undirected quote from cmtt (char 0x0d).
! 2301: % The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it the default, but it
! 2302: % works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least evince), the
! 2303: % lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the regular 0x27.
! 2304: %
! 2305: \def\codequoteright{%
! 2306: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
! 2307: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
! 2308: '%
! 2309: \else \char'15 \fi
! 2310: \else \char'15 \fi
! 2311: }
! 2312: %
! 2313: % and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent.
! 2314: % Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like
! 2315: % the code environments to do likewise.
! 2316: %
! 2317: \def\codequoteleft{%
! 2318: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
! 2319: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
! 2320: % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
! 2321: % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
! 2322: \relax`%
! 2323: \else \char'22 \fi
! 2324: \else \char'22 \fi
! 2325: }
! 2326:
! 2327: % Commands to set the quote options.
! 2328: %
! 2329: \parseargdef\codequoteundirected{%
! 2330: \def\temp{#1}%
! 2331: \ifx\temp\onword
! 2332: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname
! 2333: = t%
! 2334: \else\ifx\temp\offword
! 2335: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname
! 2336: = \relax
! 2337: \else
! 2338: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 2339: \errmessage{Unknown @codequoteundirected value `\temp', must be on|off}%
! 2340: \fi\fi
! 2341: }
! 2342: %
! 2343: \parseargdef\codequotebacktick{%
! 2344: \def\temp{#1}%
! 2345: \ifx\temp\onword
! 2346: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname
! 2347: = t%
! 2348: \else\ifx\temp\offword
! 2349: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname
! 2350: = \relax
! 2351: \else
! 2352: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 2353: \errmessage{Unknown @codequotebacktick value `\temp', must be on|off}%
! 2354: \fi\fi
! 2355: }
! 2356:
! 2357: % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
! 2358: \def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq}
! 2359:
! 2360: % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
! 2361: \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
! 2362:
! 2363: % Font commands.
! 2364:
! 2365: % #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant.
! 2366: % If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl,
! 2367: % and 2) do not add an italic correction.
! 2368: \def\dosmartslant#1#2{%
! 2369: \ifusingtt
! 2370: {{\ttsl #2}\let\next=\relax}%
! 2371: {\def\next{{#1#2}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}}%
! 2372: \next
! 2373: }
! 2374: \def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl}
! 2375: \def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it}
! 2376:
! 2377: % Output an italic correction unless \next (presumed to be the following
! 2378: % character) is such as not to need one.
! 2379: \def\smartitaliccorrection{%
! 2380: \ifx\next,%
! 2381: \else\ifx\next-%
! 2382: \else\ifx\next.%
! 2383: \else\ifx\next\.%
! 2384: \else\ifx\next\comma%
! 2385: \else\ptexslash
! 2386: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
! 2387: \aftersmartic
! 2388: }
! 2389:
! 2390: % Unconditional use \ttsl, and no ic. @var is set to this for defuns.
! 2391: \def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}}
! 2392:
! 2393: % @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want
! 2394: % ttsl for book titles, do we?
! 2395: \def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}
! 2396:
! 2397: \def\aftersmartic{}
! 2398: \def\var#1{%
! 2399: \let\saveaftersmartic = \aftersmartic
! 2400: \def\aftersmartic{\null\let\aftersmartic=\saveaftersmartic}%
! 2401: \smartslanted{#1}%
! 2402: }
! 2403:
! 2404: \let\i=\smartitalic
! 2405: \let\slanted=\smartslanted
! 2406: \let\dfn=\smartslanted
! 2407: \let\emph=\smartitalic
! 2408:
! 2409: % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
! 2410: \def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font
! 2411: \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
! 2412: \def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
! 2413:
! 2414: % @b, explicit bold. Also @strong.
! 2415: \def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
! 2416: \let\strong=\b
! 2417:
! 2418: % @sansserif, explicit sans.
! 2419: \def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
! 2420:
! 2421: % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
! 2422: % the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
! 2423: % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
! 2424: %
! 2425: \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
! 2426: \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
! 2427:
! 2428: % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
! 2429: % Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
! 2430: % sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
! 2431: %
! 2432: \catcode`@=11
! 2433: \def\plainfrenchspacing{%
! 2434: \sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
! 2435: \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
! 2436: \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
! 2437: }
! 2438: \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
! 2439: \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000
! 2440: \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250
! 2441: \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
! 2442: }
! 2443: \catcode`@=\other
! 2444: \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default
! 2445:
! 2446: % @t, explicit typewriter.
! 2447: \def\t#1{%
! 2448: {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
! 2449: \null
! 2450: }
! 2451:
! 2452: % @samp.
! 2453: \def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}}
! 2454:
! 2455: % @indicateurl is \samp, that is, with quotes.
! 2456: \let\indicateurl=\samp
! 2457:
! 2458: % @code (and similar) prints in typewriter, but with spaces the same
! 2459: % size as normal in the surrounding text, without hyphenation, etc.
! 2460: % This is a subroutine for that.
! 2461: \def\tclose#1{%
! 2462: {%
! 2463: % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
! 2464: \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
! 2465: %
! 2466: % Switch to typewriter.
! 2467: \tt
! 2468: %
! 2469: % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
! 2470: \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
! 2471: %
! 2472: % Turn off hyphenation.
! 2473: \nohyphenation
! 2474: %
! 2475: \rawbackslash
! 2476: \plainfrenchspacing
! 2477: #1%
! 2478: }%
! 2479: \null % reset spacefactor to 1000
! 2480: }
! 2481:
! 2482: % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
! 2483: % (But see \codedashfinish below.)
! 2484: % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
! 2485: % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
! 2486: %
! 2487: % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
! 2488: % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
! 2489: % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
! 2490: % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. -- rms.
! 2491: {
! 2492: \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
! 2493: \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active
! 2494: \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions
! 2495: %
! 2496: \global\def\code{\begingroup
! 2497: \setupmarkupstyle{code}%
! 2498: % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers.
! 2499: \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active
! 2500: \ifallowcodebreaks
! 2501: \let-\codedash
! 2502: \let_\codeunder
! 2503: \else
! 2504: \let-\normaldash
! 2505: \let_\realunder
! 2506: \fi
! 2507: % Given -foo (with a single dash), we do not want to allow a break
! 2508: % after the hyphen.
! 2509: \global\let\codedashprev=\codedash
! 2510: %
! 2511: \codex
! 2512: }
! 2513: %
! 2514: \gdef\codedash{\futurelet\next\codedashfinish}
! 2515: \gdef\codedashfinish{%
! 2516: \normaldash % always output the dash character itself.
! 2517: %
! 2518: % Now, output a discretionary to allow a line break, unless
! 2519: % (a) the next character is a -, or
! 2520: % (b) the preceding character is a -.
! 2521: % E.g., given --posix, we do not want to allow a break after either -.
! 2522: % Given --foo-bar, we do want to allow a break between the - and the b.
! 2523: \ifx\next\codedash \else
! 2524: \ifx\codedashprev\codedash
! 2525: \else \discretionary{}{}{}\fi
! 2526: \fi
! 2527: % we need the space after the = for the case when \next itself is a
! 2528: % space token; it would get swallowed otherwise. As in @code{- a}.
! 2529: \global\let\codedashprev= \next
! 2530: }
! 2531: }
! 2532: \def\normaldash{-}
! 2533: %
! 2534: \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
! 2535:
! 2536: \def\codeunder{%
! 2537: % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _
! 2538: % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
! 2539: % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
! 2540: % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
! 2541: \ifusingtt{\ifmmode
! 2542: \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
! 2543: \else\normalunderscore \fi
! 2544: \discretionary{}{}{}}%
! 2545: {\_}%
! 2546: }
! 2547:
! 2548: % An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
! 2549: % each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is bad.
! 2550: % @allowcodebreaks provides a document-level way to turn breaking at -
! 2551: % and _ on and off.
! 2552: %
! 2553: \newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue
! 2554:
! 2555: \def\keywordtrue{true}
! 2556: \def\keywordfalse{false}
! 2557:
! 2558: \parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{%
! 2559: \def\txiarg{#1}%
! 2560: \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue
! 2561: \allowcodebreakstrue
! 2562: \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse
! 2563: \allowcodebreaksfalse
! 2564: \else
! 2565: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 2566: \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg', must be true|false}%
! 2567: \fi\fi
! 2568: }
! 2569:
! 2570: % For @command, @env, @file, @option quotes seem unnecessary,
! 2571: % so use \code rather than \samp.
! 2572: \let\command=\code
! 2573: \let\env=\code
! 2574: \let\file=\code
! 2575: \let\option=\code
! 2576:
! 2577: % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
! 2578: % second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
! 2579: % arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
! 2580: % itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url.
! 2581: % (This \urefnobreak definition isn't used now, leaving it for a while
! 2582: % for comparison.)
! 2583: \def\urefnobreak#1{\dourefnobreak #1,,,\finish}
! 2584: \def\dourefnobreak#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
! 2585: \unsepspaces
! 2586: \pdfurl{#1}%
! 2587: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
! 2588: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
! 2589: \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
! 2590: \else
! 2591: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
! 2592: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
! 2593: \ifpdf
! 2594: \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
! 2595: \else
! 2596: \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
! 2597: \fi
! 2598: \else
! 2599: \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
! 2600: \fi
! 2601: \fi
! 2602: \endlink
! 2603: \endgroup}
! 2604:
! 2605: % This \urefbreak definition is the active one.
! 2606: \def\urefbreak{\begingroup \urefcatcodes \dourefbreak}
! 2607: \let\uref=\urefbreak
! 2608: \def\dourefbreak#1{\urefbreakfinish #1,,,\finish}
! 2609: \def\urefbreakfinish#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% doesn't work in @example
! 2610: \unsepspaces
! 2611: \pdfurl{#1}%
! 2612: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
! 2613: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
! 2614: \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
! 2615: \else
! 2616: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
! 2617: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
! 2618: \ifpdf
! 2619: \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
! 2620: \else
! 2621: \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
! 2622: \fi
! 2623: \else
! 2624: \urefcode{#1}% only url given, so show it
! 2625: \fi
! 2626: \fi
! 2627: \endlink
! 2628: \endgroup}
! 2629:
! 2630: % Allow line breaks around only a few characters (only).
! 2631: \def\urefcatcodes{%
! 2632: \catcode\ampChar=\active \catcode\dotChar=\active
! 2633: \catcode\hashChar=\active \catcode\questChar=\active
! 2634: \catcode\slashChar=\active
! 2635: }
! 2636: {
! 2637: \urefcatcodes
! 2638: %
! 2639: \global\def\urefcode{\begingroup
! 2640: \setupmarkupstyle{code}%
! 2641: \urefcatcodes
! 2642: \let&\urefcodeamp
! 2643: \let.\urefcodedot
! 2644: \let#\urefcodehash
! 2645: \let?\urefcodequest
! 2646: \let/\urefcodeslash
! 2647: \codex
! 2648: }
! 2649: %
! 2650: % By default, they are just regular characters.
! 2651: \global\def&{\normalamp}
! 2652: \global\def.{\normaldot}
! 2653: \global\def#{\normalhash}
! 2654: \global\def?{\normalquest}
! 2655: \global\def/{\normalslash}
! 2656: }
! 2657:
! 2658: % we put a little stretch before and after the breakable chars, to help
! 2659: % line breaking of long url's. The unequal skips make look better in
! 2660: % cmtt at least, especially for dots.
! 2661: \def\urefprestretch{\urefprebreak \hskip0pt plus.13em }
! 2662: \def\urefpoststretch{\urefpostbreak \hskip0pt plus.1em }
! 2663: %
! 2664: \def\urefcodeamp{\urefprestretch \&\urefpoststretch}
! 2665: \def\urefcodedot{\urefprestretch .\urefpoststretch}
! 2666: \def\urefcodehash{\urefprestretch \#\urefpoststretch}
! 2667: \def\urefcodequest{\urefprestretch ?\urefpoststretch}
! 2668: \def\urefcodeslash{\futurelet\next\urefcodeslashfinish}
! 2669: {
! 2670: \catcode`\/=\active
! 2671: \global\def\urefcodeslashfinish{%
! 2672: \urefprestretch \slashChar
! 2673: % Allow line break only after the final / in a sequence of
! 2674: % slashes, to avoid line break between the slashes in http://.
! 2675: \ifx\next/\else \urefpoststretch \fi
! 2676: }
! 2677: }
! 2678:
! 2679: % One more complication: by default we'll break after the special
! 2680: % characters, but some people like to break before the special chars, so
! 2681: % allow that. Also allow no breaking at all, for manual control.
! 2682: %
! 2683: \parseargdef\urefbreakstyle{%
! 2684: \def\txiarg{#1}%
! 2685: \ifx\txiarg\wordnone
! 2686: \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
! 2687: \else\ifx\txiarg\wordbefore
! 2688: \def\urefprebreak{\allowbreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
! 2689: \else\ifx\txiarg\wordafter
! 2690: \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\allowbreak}
! 2691: \else
! 2692: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 2693: \errmessage{Unknown @urefbreakstyle setting `\txiarg'}%
! 2694: \fi\fi\fi
! 2695: }
! 2696: \def\wordafter{after}
! 2697: \def\wordbefore{before}
! 2698: \def\wordnone{none}
! 2699:
! 2700: \urefbreakstyle after
! 2701:
! 2702: % @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
! 2703: %
! 2704: \let\url=\uref
! 2705:
! 2706: % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
! 2707: % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
! 2708: %
! 2709: %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
! 2710: \ifpdf
! 2711: \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
! 2712: \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
! 2713: \unsepspaces
! 2714: \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
! 2715: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
! 2716: \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
! 2717: \endlink
! 2718: \endgroup}
! 2719: \else
! 2720: \let\email=\uref
! 2721: \fi
! 2722:
! 2723: % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
! 2724: % `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
! 2725: % or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
! 2726: \parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
! 2727: \def\txiarg{#1}%
! 2728: \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
! 2729: \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
! 2730: \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
! 2731: \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
! 2732: \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
! 2733: \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
! 2734: \else
! 2735: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 2736: \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle setting `\txiarg'}%
! 2737: \fi\fi\fi
! 2738: }
! 2739: \def\worddistinct{distinct}
! 2740: \def\wordexample{example}
! 2741: \def\wordcode{code}
! 2742:
! 2743: % Default is `distinct'.
! 2744: \kbdinputstyle distinct
! 2745:
! 2746: % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
! 2747: % then @kbd has no effect.
! 2748: \def\kbd#1{{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdsub\look??\par}}
! 2749:
! 2750: \def\xkey{\key}
! 2751: \def\kbdsub#1#2#3\par{%
! 2752: \def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
! 2753: \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
! 2754: \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
! 2755: \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
! 2756: }
! 2757:
! 2758: % definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size.
! 2759: %\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
! 2760: %\font\keysy=cmsy9
! 2761: %\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
! 2762: % \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
! 2763: % \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
! 2764: % \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
! 2765: % \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
! 2766: % \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
! 2767:
! 2768: % definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already
! 2769: % monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But
! 2770: % if it isn't monospace, then use \tt.
! 2771: %
! 2772: \def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}%
! 2773: \nohyphenation
! 2774: \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi
! 2775: #1}\null}
! 2776:
! 2777: % @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...}
! 2778: \def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup}
! 2779:
! 2780: % @clickstyle @arrow (by default)
! 2781: \parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}}
! 2782: \def\click{\arrow}
! 2783:
! 2784: % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
! 2785: % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
! 2786: %
! 2787: \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
! 2788:
! 2789: % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
! 2790: % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for
! 2791: % Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96.
! 2792: %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
! 2793:
! 2794: % @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
! 2795: % We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
! 2796: % all-uppercase.
! 2797: %
! 2798: \def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
! 2799: \def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
! 2800: {\selectfonts\lsize #1}%
! 2801: \def\temp{#2}%
! 2802: \ifx\temp\empty \else
! 2803: \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
! 2804: \fi
! 2805: \null % reset \spacefactor=1000
! 2806: }
! 2807:
! 2808: % @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
! 2809: % No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
! 2810: %
! 2811: \def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
! 2812: \def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
! 2813: {\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
! 2814: \def\temp{#2}%
! 2815: \ifx\temp\empty \else
! 2816: \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
! 2817: \fi
! 2818: \null % reset \spacefactor=1000
! 2819: }
! 2820:
! 2821: % @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
! 2822: %
! 2823: \def\asis#1{#1}
! 2824:
! 2825: % @math outputs its argument in math mode.
! 2826: %
! 2827: % One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
! 2828: % an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make
! 2829: % _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
! 2830: % which is what @var uses.
! 2831: {
! 2832: \catcode`\_ = \active
! 2833: \gdef\mathunderscore{%
! 2834: \catcode`\_=\active
! 2835: \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
! 2836: }
! 2837: }
! 2838: % Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a math (or tt) \.
! 2839: % FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (for no
! 2840: % particular reason), but this is not advertised and we don't care.
! 2841: %
! 2842: % The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
! 2843: \def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
! 2844: %
! 2845: \def\math{%
! 2846: \tex
! 2847: \mathunderscore
! 2848: \let\\ = \mathbackslash
! 2849: \mathactive
! 2850: % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode
! 2851: \let\"=\ddot
! 2852: \let\'=\acute
! 2853: \let\==\bar
! 2854: \let\^=\hat
! 2855: \let\`=\grave
! 2856: \let\u=\breve
! 2857: \let\v=\check
! 2858: \let\~=\tilde
! 2859: \let\dotaccent=\dot
! 2860: $\finishmath
! 2861: }
! 2862: \def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex.
! 2863:
! 2864: % Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
! 2865: % We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
! 2866: % to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
! 2867: %
! 2868: {
! 2869: \catcode`^ = \active
! 2870: \catcode`< = \active
! 2871: \catcode`> = \active
! 2872: \catcode`+ = \active
! 2873: \catcode`' = \active
! 2874: \gdef\mathactive{%
! 2875: \let^ = \ptexhat
! 2876: \let< = \ptexless
! 2877: \let> = \ptexgtr
! 2878: \let+ = \ptexplus
! 2879: \let' = \ptexquoteright
! 2880: }
! 2881: }
! 2882:
! 2883: % ctrl is no longer a Texinfo command, but leave this definition for fun.
! 2884: \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
! 2885:
! 2886: % @inlinefmt{FMTNAME,PROCESSED-TEXT} and @inlineraw{FMTNAME,RAW-TEXT}.
! 2887: % Ignore unless FMTNAME == tex; then it is like @iftex and @tex,
! 2888: % except specified as a normal braced arg, so no newlines to worry about.
! 2889: %
! 2890: \def\outfmtnametex{tex}
! 2891: %
! 2892: \long\def\inlinefmt#1{\doinlinefmt #1,\finish}
! 2893: \long\def\doinlinefmt#1,#2,\finish{%
! 2894: \def\inlinefmtname{#1}%
! 2895: \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
! 2896: }
! 2897: %
! 2898: % @inlinefmtifelse{FMTNAME,THEN-TEXT,ELSE-TEXT} expands THEN-TEXT if
! 2899: % FMTNAME is tex, else ELSE-TEXT.
! 2900: \long\def\inlinefmtifelse#1{\doinlinefmtifelse #1,,,\finish}
! 2901: \long\def\doinlinefmtifelse#1,#2,#3,#4,\finish{%
! 2902: \def\inlinefmtname{#1}%
! 2903: \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\else \ignorespaces #3\fi
! 2904: }
! 2905: %
! 2906: % For raw, must switch into @tex before parsing the argument, to avoid
! 2907: % setting catcodes prematurely. Doing it this way means that, for
! 2908: % example, @inlineraw{html, foo{bar} gets a parse error instead of being
! 2909: % ignored. But this isn't important because if people want a literal
! 2910: % *right* brace they would have to use a command anyway, so they may as
! 2911: % well use a command to get a left brace too. We could re-use the
! 2912: % delimiter character idea from \verb, but it seems like overkill.
! 2913: %
! 2914: \long\def\inlineraw{\tex \doinlineraw}
! 2915: \long\def\doinlineraw#1{\doinlinerawtwo #1,\finish}
! 2916: \def\doinlinerawtwo#1,#2,\finish{%
! 2917: \def\inlinerawname{#1}%
! 2918: \ifx\inlinerawname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
! 2919: \endgroup % close group opened by \tex.
! 2920: }
! 2921:
! 2922: % @inlineifset{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is @set.
! 2923: %
! 2924: \long\def\inlineifset#1{\doinlineifset #1,\finish}
! 2925: \long\def\doinlineifset#1,#2,\finish{%
! 2926: \def\inlinevarname{#1}%
! 2927: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax
! 2928: \else\ignorespaces#2\fi
! 2929: }
! 2930:
! 2931: % @inlineifclear{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is not @set.
! 2932: %
! 2933: \long\def\inlineifclear#1{\doinlineifclear #1,\finish}
! 2934: \long\def\doinlineifclear#1,#2,\finish{%
! 2935: \def\inlinevarname{#1}%
! 2936: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax \ignorespaces#2\fi
! 2937: }
! 2938:
! 2939:
! 2940: \message{glyphs,}
! 2941: % and logos.
! 2942:
! 2943: % @@ prints an @, as does @atchar{}.
! 2944: \def\@{\char64 }
! 2945: \let\atchar=\@
! 2946:
! 2947: % @{ @} @lbracechar{} @rbracechar{} all generate brace characters.
! 2948: % Unless we're in typewriter, use \ecfont because the CM text fonts do
! 2949: % not have braces, and we don't want to switch into math.
! 2950: \def\mylbrace{{\ifmonospace\else\ecfont\fi \char123}}
! 2951: \def\myrbrace{{\ifmonospace\else\ecfont\fi \char125}}
! 2952: \let\{=\mylbrace \let\lbracechar=\{
! 2953: \let\}=\myrbrace \let\rbracechar=\}
! 2954: \begingroup
! 2955: % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
! 2956: % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files.
! 2957: \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
! 2958: \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
! 2959: \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
! 2960: !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
! 2961: !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
! 2962: !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
! 2963: !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
! 2964: !endgroup
! 2965:
! 2966: % @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
! 2967: \let\comma = ,
! 2968:
! 2969: % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
! 2970: % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
! 2971: \let\, = \ptexc
! 2972: \let\dotaccent = \ptexdot
! 2973: \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
! 2974: \let\tieaccent = \ptext
! 2975: \let\ubaraccent = \ptexb
! 2976: \let\udotaccent = \d
! 2977:
! 2978: % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
! 2979: % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
! 2980: \def\questiondown{?`}
! 2981: \def\exclamdown{!`}
! 2982: \def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
! 2983: \def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}
! 2984:
! 2985: % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
! 2986: \def\imacro{i}
! 2987: \def\jmacro{j}
! 2988: \def\dotless#1{%
! 2989: \def\temp{#1}%
! 2990: \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi
! 2991: \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi
! 2992: \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
! 2993: \fi\fi
! 2994: }
! 2995:
! 2996: % The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
! 2997: % period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.)
! 2998: %
! 2999: \edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
! 3000:
! 3001: % @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in
! 3002: % latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
! 3003: % convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
! 3004: % the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
! 3005: % \scriptscriptstyle).
! 3006: %
! 3007: \def\LaTeX{%
! 3008: L\kern-.36em
! 3009: {\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
! 3010: \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{%
! 3011: \ifx\textnominalsize\xwordpt
! 3012: % for 10pt running text, \lllsize (8pt) is too small for the A in LaTeX.
! 3013: % Revert to plain's \scriptsize, which is 7pt.
! 3014: \count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$%
! 3015: \else
! 3016: % For 11pt, we can use our lllsize.
! 3017: \selectfonts\lllsize A%
! 3018: \fi
! 3019: }%
! 3020: \vss
! 3021: }}%
! 3022: \kern-.15em
! 3023: \TeX
! 3024: }
! 3025:
! 3026: % Some math mode symbols.
! 3027: \def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$}
! 3028: \def\geq{\ifmmode \ge\else $\ge$\fi}
! 3029: \def\leq{\ifmmode \le\else $\le$\fi}
! 3030: \def\minus{\ifmmode -\else $-$\fi}
! 3031:
! 3032: % @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
! 3033: % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm
! 3034: % typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand,
! 3035: % in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do
! 3036: % whichever is larger.
! 3037: %
! 3038: \def\dots{%
! 3039: \leavevmode
! 3040: \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods
! 3041: \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em
! 3042: \dimen0 = \wd0
! 3043: \else
! 3044: \dimen0 = 1.5em
! 3045: \fi
! 3046: \hbox to \dimen0{%
! 3047: \hskip 0pt plus.25fil
! 3048: .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
! 3049: .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
! 3050: .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil
! 3051: }%
! 3052: }
! 3053:
! 3054: % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
! 3055: %
! 3056: \def\enddots{%
! 3057: \dots
! 3058: \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
! 3059: }
! 3060:
! 3061: % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
! 3062: %
! 3063: % Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of
! 3064: % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
! 3065: %
! 3066: \def\point{$\star$}
! 3067: \def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}}
! 3068: \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
! 3069: \def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
! 3070: \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
! 3071: \def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
! 3072:
! 3073: % The @error{} command.
! 3074: % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
! 3075: %
! 3076: \newbox\errorbox
! 3077: %
! 3078: {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
! 3079: \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
! 3080: % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
! 3081: \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf \putworderror\kern-1.5pt}
! 3082: %
! 3083: \setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
! 3084: \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
! 3085: \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
! 3086: \vbox{%
! 3087: \hrule height\dimen2
! 3088: \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
! 3089: \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
! 3090: \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
! 3091: \hrule height\dimen2}
! 3092: \hfil}
! 3093: %
! 3094: \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
! 3095:
! 3096: % @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
! 3097: %
! 3098: \def\pounds{{\it\$}}
! 3099:
! 3100: % @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
! 3101: % We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
! 3102: % Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
! 3103: % "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
! 3104: % It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
! 3105: %
! 3106: % Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
! 3107: % that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
! 3108: % font height.
! 3109: %
! 3110: % feymr - regular
! 3111: % feymo - slanted
! 3112: % feybr - bold
! 3113: % feybo - bold slanted
! 3114: %
! 3115: % There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
! 3116: % A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
! 3117: % Hmm.
! 3118: %
! 3119: % Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
! 3120: % Hope not.
! 3121: %
! 3122: %
! 3123: \def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
! 3124: \def\eurofont{%
! 3125: % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
! 3126: % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
! 3127: % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
! 3128: % font installed.
! 3129: %
! 3130: % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
! 3131: % that to the current nominal size.
! 3132: %
! 3133: % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
! 3134: % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
! 3135: %
! 3136: \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
! 3137: %
! 3138: \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
! 3139: % bold:
! 3140: \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
! 3141: \else
! 3142: % regular:
! 3143: \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
! 3144: \fi
! 3145: \thiseurofont
! 3146: }
! 3147:
! 3148: % Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because
! 3149: % sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect
! 3150: % the redefinition.
! 3151: %
! 3152: % Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters.
! 3153: \def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth
! 3154: \def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth
! 3155: \def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn
! 3156: \def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn
! 3157: %
! 3158: \def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}}
! 3159: \def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft}
! 3160: \def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}}
! 3161: \def\guillemotright{\guillemetright}
! 3162: \def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}}
! 3163: \def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}}
! 3164: \def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}}
! 3165: \def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}}
! 3166: %
! 3167: % This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but
! 3168: % we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the
! 3169: % tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer
! 3170: % dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc.
! 3171: %
! 3172: % ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using
! 3173: % the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in
! 3174: % the same EC font.
! 3175: \def\ogonek#1{{%
! 3176: \def\temp{#1}%
! 3177: \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek
! 3178: \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek
! 3179: \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek
! 3180: \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek
! 3181: \else
! 3182: \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}%
! 3183: \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1%
! 3184: \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}%
! 3185: \fi
! 3186: \fi\fi\fi\fi
! 3187: }%
! 3188: }
! 3189: \def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A}
! 3190: \def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a}
! 3191: \def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E}
! 3192: \def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e}
! 3193: %
! 3194: % Use the ec* fonts (cm-super in outline format) for non-CM glyphs.
! 3195: \def\ecfont{%
! 3196: % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this
! 3197: % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German
! 3198: % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so
! 3199: % hopefully nobody will notice/care.
! 3200: \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}%
! 3201: \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
! 3202: \ifmonospace
! 3203: % typewriter:
! 3204: \font\thisecfont = ectt\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
! 3205: \else
! 3206: \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
! 3207: % bold:
! 3208: \font\thisecfont = ecb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
! 3209: \else
! 3210: % regular:
! 3211: \font\thisecfont = ec\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
! 3212: \fi
! 3213: \fi
! 3214: \thisecfont
! 3215: }
! 3216:
! 3217: % @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really
! 3218: % be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
! 3219: % Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
! 3220: %
! 3221: \def\registeredsymbol{%
! 3222: $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}%
! 3223: \hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
! 3224: }$%
! 3225: }
! 3226:
! 3227: % @textdegree - the normal degrees sign.
! 3228: %
! 3229: \def\textdegree{$^\circ$}
! 3230:
! 3231: % Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
! 3232: % Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38
! 3233: % so we'll define it if necessary.
! 3234: %
! 3235: \ifx\Orb\thisisundefined
! 3236: \def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
! 3237: \fi
! 3238:
! 3239: % Quotes.
! 3240: \chardef\quotedblleft="5C
! 3241: \chardef\quotedblright=`\"
! 3242: \chardef\quoteleft=`\`
! 3243: \chardef\quoteright=`\'
! 3244:
! 3245:
! 3246: \message{page headings,}
! 3247:
! 3248: \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
! 3249: \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
! 3250:
! 3251: % First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
! 3252: \newif\ifseenauthor
! 3253: \newif\iffinishedtitlepage
! 3254:
! 3255: % Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
! 3256: % user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
! 3257: %
! 3258: \newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
! 3259: \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
! 3260: \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
! 3261: \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
! 3262:
! 3263: \parseargdef\shorttitlepage{%
! 3264: \begingroup \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
! 3265: \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
! 3266:
! 3267: \envdef\titlepage{%
! 3268: % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
! 3269: \begingroup
! 3270: \parindent=0pt \textfonts
! 3271: % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
! 3272: \vglue\titlepagetopglue
! 3273: % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
! 3274: \finishedtitlepagetrue
! 3275: %
! 3276: % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
! 3277: % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
! 3278: \let\oldpage = \page
! 3279: \def\page{%
! 3280: \iffinishedtitlepage\else
! 3281: \finishtitlepage
! 3282: \fi
! 3283: \let\page = \oldpage
! 3284: \page
! 3285: \null
! 3286: }%
! 3287: }
! 3288:
! 3289: \def\Etitlepage{%
! 3290: \iffinishedtitlepage\else
! 3291: \finishtitlepage
! 3292: \fi
! 3293: % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
! 3294: % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
! 3295: % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
! 3296: % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
! 3297: \oldpage
! 3298: \endgroup
! 3299: %
! 3300: % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
! 3301: % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
! 3302: \HEADINGSon
! 3303: %
! 3304: % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
! 3305: \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
! 3306: \shortcontents
! 3307: \contents
! 3308: \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
! 3309: \global\let\contents = \relax
! 3310: \fi
! 3311: %
! 3312: \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
! 3313: \contents
! 3314: \global\let\contents = \relax
! 3315: \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
! 3316: \fi
! 3317: }
! 3318:
! 3319: \def\finishtitlepage{%
! 3320: \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
! 3321: \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
! 3322: \finishedtitlepagetrue
! 3323: }
! 3324:
! 3325: % Settings used for typesetting titles: no hyphenation, no indentation,
! 3326: % don't worry much about spacing, ragged right. This should be used
! 3327: % inside a \vbox, and fonts need to be set appropriately first. Because
! 3328: % it is always used for titles, nothing else, we call \rmisbold. \par
! 3329: % should be specified before the end of the \vbox, since a vbox is a group.
! 3330: %
! 3331: \def\raggedtitlesettings{%
! 3332: \rmisbold
! 3333: \hyphenpenalty=10000
! 3334: \parindent=0pt
! 3335: \tolerance=5000
! 3336: \ptexraggedright
! 3337: }
! 3338:
! 3339: % Macros to be used within @titlepage:
! 3340:
! 3341: \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
! 3342: \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
! 3343:
! 3344: \parseargdef\title{%
! 3345: \checkenv\titlepage
! 3346: \vbox{\titlefonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
! 3347: % print a rule at the page bottom also.
! 3348: \finishedtitlepagefalse
! 3349: \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
! 3350: }
! 3351:
! 3352: \parseargdef\subtitle{%
! 3353: \checkenv\titlepage
! 3354: {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
! 3355: }
! 3356:
! 3357: % @author should come last, but may come many times.
! 3358: % It can also be used inside @quotation.
! 3359: %
! 3360: \parseargdef\author{%
! 3361: \def\temp{\quotation}%
! 3362: \ifx\thisenv\temp
! 3363: \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
! 3364: \else
! 3365: \checkenv\titlepage
! 3366: \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
! 3367: {\secfonts\rmisbold \leftline{#1}}%
! 3368: \fi
! 3369: }
! 3370:
! 3371:
! 3372: % Set up page headings and footings.
! 3373:
! 3374: \let\thispage=\folio
! 3375:
! 3376: \newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages
! 3377: \newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages
! 3378: \newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages
! 3379: \newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages
! 3380:
! 3381: % Now make TeX use those variables
! 3382: \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
! 3383: \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
! 3384: \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
! 3385: \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
! 3386: \let\HEADINGShook=\relax
! 3387:
! 3388: % Commands to set those variables.
! 3389: % For example, this is what @headings on does
! 3390: % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
! 3391: % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
! 3392: % @evenfooting @thisfile||
! 3393: % @oddfooting ||@thisfile
! 3394:
! 3395:
! 3396: \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
! 3397: \def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
! 3398: \def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
! 3399: \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
! 3400:
! 3401: \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
! 3402: \def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
! 3403: \def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
! 3404: \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
! 3405:
! 3406: \parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
! 3407:
! 3408: \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
! 3409: \def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
! 3410: \def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
! 3411: \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
! 3412:
! 3413: \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
! 3414: \def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
! 3415: \def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
! 3416: \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
! 3417: %
! 3418: % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
! 3419: % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
! 3420: \global\advance\pageheight by -12pt
! 3421: \global\advance\vsize by -12pt
! 3422: }
! 3423:
! 3424: \parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
! 3425:
! 3426: % @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page
! 3427: % @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page
! 3428: %
! 3429: % The same set of arguments for:
! 3430: %
! 3431: % @oddheadingmarks
! 3432: % @evenfootingmarks
! 3433: % @oddfootingmarks
! 3434: % @everyheadingmarks
! 3435: % @everyfootingmarks
! 3436:
! 3437: \def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}}
! 3438: \def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}}
! 3439: \def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}}
! 3440: \def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}}
! 3441: \def\everyheadingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1}
! 3442: \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} }
! 3443: \def\everyfootingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1}
! 3444: \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} }
! 3445: % #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom.
! 3446: \def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {%
! 3447: \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname
! 3448: \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp
! 3449: }
! 3450:
! 3451: \everyheadingmarks bottom
! 3452: \everyfootingmarks bottom
! 3453:
! 3454: % @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
! 3455: % @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
! 3456: % @headings off turns them off.
! 3457: % @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
! 3458: % @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
! 3459: % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
! 3460: % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
! 3461: % By default, they are off at the start of a document,
! 3462: % and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
! 3463:
! 3464: \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
! 3465:
! 3466: \def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination
! 3467: \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}%
! 3468: \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}%
! 3469: }
! 3470:
! 3471: \def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=1 \headingsoff}} % global setting
! 3472: \HEADINGSoff % it's the default
! 3473:
! 3474: % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
! 3475: % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
! 3476: % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
! 3477: % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
! 3478: % edge of all pages.
! 3479: \def\HEADINGSdouble{%
! 3480: \global\pageno=1
! 3481: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
! 3482: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
! 3483: \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
! 3484: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
! 3485: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
! 3486: }
! 3487: \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
! 3488:
! 3489: % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
! 3490: % page number on top right.
! 3491: \def\HEADINGSsingle{%
! 3492: \global\pageno=1
! 3493: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
! 3494: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
! 3495: \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
! 3496: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
! 3497: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
! 3498: }
! 3499: \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
! 3500:
! 3501: \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
! 3502: \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
! 3503: \def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
! 3504: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
! 3505: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
! 3506: \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
! 3507: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
! 3508: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
! 3509: }
! 3510:
! 3511: \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
! 3512: \def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
! 3513: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
! 3514: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
! 3515: \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
! 3516: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
! 3517: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
! 3518: }
! 3519:
! 3520: % Subroutines used in generating headings
! 3521: % This produces Day Month Year style of output.
! 3522: % Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
! 3523: % up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
! 3524: \ifx\today\thisisundefined
! 3525: \def\today{%
! 3526: \number\day\space
! 3527: \ifcase\month
! 3528: \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
! 3529: \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
! 3530: \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
! 3531: \fi
! 3532: \space\number\year}
! 3533: \fi
! 3534:
! 3535: % @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings.
! 3536: % It generates no output of its own.
! 3537: \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
! 3538: \def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
! 3539:
! 3540:
! 3541: \message{tables,}
! 3542: % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
! 3543:
! 3544: % default indentation of table text
! 3545: \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
! 3546: % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
! 3547: \newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in
! 3548: % margin between end of table item and start of table text.
! 3549: \newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in
! 3550:
! 3551: % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
! 3552: \newdimen\itemmax
! 3553:
! 3554: % Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
! 3555: % these defs.
! 3556: % They also define \itemindex
! 3557: % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
! 3558:
! 3559: \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
! 3560:
! 3561: \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
! 3562:
! 3563: \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
! 3564: \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
! 3565:
! 3566: \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
! 3567: \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
! 3568: \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
! 3569: \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
! 3570: \itemindex{#1}%
! 3571: \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
! 3572: %
! 3573: % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
! 3574: % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
! 3575: % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
! 3576: % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
! 3577: % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
! 3578: \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
! 3579: %
! 3580: % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
! 3581: % but leave it ragged-right.
! 3582: \begingroup
! 3583: \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
! 3584: \advance\hsize by\tableindent
! 3585: \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil\relax
! 3586: \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
! 3587: \endgroup
! 3588: %
! 3589: % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
! 3590: % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
! 3591: \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
! 3592: %
! 3593: % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if
! 3594: % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
! 3595: % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
! 3596: % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this
! 3597: % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
! 3598: % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also.
! 3599: %
! 3600: \penalty 10001
! 3601: \endgroup
! 3602: \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
! 3603: \else
! 3604: % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
! 3605: % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
! 3606: \noindent
! 3607: % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
! 3608: % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
! 3609: % eventually be printed.
! 3610: \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
! 3611: \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
! 3612: \unhbox0
! 3613: \nobreak\kern\dimen0
! 3614: \endgroup
! 3615: \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
! 3616: \fi
! 3617: }
! 3618:
! 3619: \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
! 3620: \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
! 3621:
! 3622: % @table, @ftable, @vtable.
! 3623: \envdef\table{%
! 3624: \let\itemindex\gobble
! 3625: \tablecheck{table}%
! 3626: }
! 3627: \envdef\ftable{%
! 3628: \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
! 3629: \tablecheck{ftable}%
! 3630: }
! 3631: \envdef\vtable{%
! 3632: \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
! 3633: \tablecheck{vtable}%
! 3634: }
! 3635: \def\tablecheck#1{%
! 3636: \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
! 3637: \endgroup
! 3638: \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
! 3639: that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
! 3640: \def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
! 3641: \else
! 3642: \let\next\tablex
! 3643: \fi
! 3644: \next
! 3645: }
! 3646: \def\tablex#1{%
! 3647: \def\itemindicate{#1}%
! 3648: \parsearg\tabley
! 3649: }
! 3650: \def\tabley#1{%
! 3651: {%
! 3652: \makevalueexpandable
! 3653: \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
! 3654: \expandafter
! 3655: }\temp \endtablez
! 3656: }
! 3657: \def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
! 3658: \aboveenvbreak
! 3659: \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
! 3660: \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
! 3661: \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
! 3662: \itemmax=\tableindent
! 3663: \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
! 3664: \advance \leftskip by \tableindent
! 3665: \exdentamount=\tableindent
! 3666: \parindent = 0pt
! 3667: \parskip = \smallskipamount
! 3668: \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
! 3669: \let\item = \internalBitem
! 3670: \let\itemx = \internalBitemx
! 3671: }
! 3672: \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
! 3673: \let\Eftable\Etable
! 3674: \let\Evtable\Etable
! 3675: \let\Eitemize\Etable
! 3676: \let\Eenumerate\Etable
! 3677:
! 3678: % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
! 3679:
! 3680: \newcount \itemno
! 3681:
! 3682: \envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
! 3683:
! 3684: \def\doitemize#1{%
! 3685: \aboveenvbreak
! 3686: \itemmax=\itemindent
! 3687: \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
! 3688: \advance\leftskip by \itemindent
! 3689: \exdentamount=\itemindent
! 3690: \parindent=0pt
! 3691: \parskip=\smallskipamount
! 3692: \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
! 3693: %
! 3694: % Try typesetting the item mark that if the document erroneously says
! 3695: % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error
! 3696: % right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the
! 3697: % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if
! 3698: % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w.
! 3699: \def\itemcontents{#1}%
! 3700: \setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}%
! 3701: %
! 3702: % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
! 3703: \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
! 3704: %
! 3705: \let\item=\itemizeitem
! 3706: }
! 3707:
! 3708: % Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
! 3709: %
! 3710: \def\itemizeitem{%
! 3711: \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations
! 3712: {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
! 3713: {%
! 3714: % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
! 3715: % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
! 3716: % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero
! 3717: % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the
! 3718: % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
! 3719: % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
! 3720: % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least
! 3721: % that's the theory.
! 3722: \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
! 3723: \noindent
! 3724: \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
! 3725: %
! 3726: \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item.
! 3727: \flushcr
! 3728: }
! 3729:
! 3730: % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
! 3731: % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
! 3732: %
! 3733: \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
! 3734:
! 3735: % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
! 3736: % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
! 3737: % argument is the same as `1'.
! 3738: %
! 3739: \envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
! 3740: \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
! 3741: % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
! 3742: \def\thearg{#1}%
! 3743: \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
! 3744: %
! 3745: % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
! 3746: % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
! 3747: % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
! 3748: % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
! 3749: % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
! 3750: \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
! 3751: \ifx\rest\empty
! 3752: % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
! 3753: % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
! 3754: % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
! 3755: % not equal to itself.
! 3756: % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
! 3757: %
! 3758: % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
! 3759: % continuing to look for a <number>.
! 3760: %
! 3761: \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
! 3762: \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
! 3763: \else
! 3764: % It's a letter.
! 3765: \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
! 3766: \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
! 3767: \else
! 3768: \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
! 3769: \fi
! 3770: \fi
! 3771: \else
! 3772: % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
! 3773: \numericenumerate
! 3774: \fi
! 3775: }
! 3776:
! 3777: % An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
! 3778: % given in \thearg.
! 3779: %
! 3780: \def\numericenumerate{%
! 3781: \itemno = \thearg
! 3782: \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
! 3783: }
! 3784:
! 3785: % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
! 3786: \def\lowercaseenumerate{%
! 3787: \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
! 3788: \startenumeration{%
! 3789: % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
! 3790: \ifnum\itemno=0
! 3791: \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
! 3792: alphabet}%
! 3793: \fi
! 3794: \char\lccode\itemno
! 3795: }%
! 3796: }
! 3797:
! 3798: % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
! 3799: \def\uppercaseenumerate{%
! 3800: \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
! 3801: \startenumeration{%
! 3802: % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
! 3803: \ifnum\itemno=0
! 3804: \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
! 3805: alphabet}
! 3806: \fi
! 3807: \char\uccode\itemno
! 3808: }%
! 3809: }
! 3810:
! 3811: % Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
! 3812: % common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
! 3813: % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
! 3814: %
! 3815: \def\startenumeration#1{%
! 3816: \advance\itemno by -1
! 3817: \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
! 3818: }
! 3819:
! 3820: % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
! 3821: % to @enumerate.
! 3822: %
! 3823: \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
! 3824: \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
! 3825: \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
! 3826: \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
! 3827:
! 3828:
! 3829: % @multitable macros
! 3830: % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
! 3831: %
! 3832: % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
! 3833: % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width
! 3834: % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
! 3835: % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
! 3836:
! 3837: % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
! 3838:
! 3839: % To make preamble:
! 3840: %
! 3841: % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
! 3842: % @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
! 3843: % @item ...
! 3844: %
! 3845: % Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
! 3846: % current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
! 3847: % columns as desired.
! 3848:
! 3849:
! 3850: % Or use a template:
! 3851: % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
! 3852: % @item ...
! 3853: % using the widest term desired in each column.
! 3854:
! 3855: % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
! 3856: % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
! 3857: % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
! 3858: % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
! 3859:
! 3860: % @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
! 3861: % if they are.
! 3862:
! 3863: % Sample multitable:
! 3864:
! 3865: % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
! 3866: % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
! 3867: % @item
! 3868: % first col stuff
! 3869: % @tab
! 3870: % second col stuff
! 3871: % @tab
! 3872: % third col
! 3873: % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
! 3874: % @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
! 3875: %
! 3876: % They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
! 3877: % @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
! 3878: % @end multitable
! 3879:
! 3880: % Default dimensions may be reset by user.
! 3881: % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
! 3882: % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
! 3883: % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
! 3884: % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
! 3885: % to baseline.
! 3886: % 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
! 3887: %
! 3888: \newskip\multitableparskip
! 3889: \newskip\multitableparindent
! 3890: \newdimen\multitablecolspace
! 3891: \newskip\multitablelinespace
! 3892: \multitableparskip=0pt
! 3893: \multitableparindent=6pt
! 3894: \multitablecolspace=12pt
! 3895: \multitablelinespace=0pt
! 3896:
! 3897: % Macros used to set up halign preamble:
! 3898: %
! 3899: \let\endsetuptable\relax
! 3900: \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
! 3901: \let\columnfractions\relax
! 3902: \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
! 3903: \newif\ifsetpercent
! 3904:
! 3905: % #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
! 3906: % be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is.
! 3907: %
! 3908: \def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
! 3909: \global\advance\colcount by 1
! 3910: \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
! 3911: \setuptable
! 3912: }
! 3913:
! 3914: \newcount\colcount
! 3915: \def\setuptable#1{%
! 3916: \def\firstarg{#1}%
! 3917: \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
! 3918: \let\go = \relax
! 3919: \else
! 3920: \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
! 3921: \global\setpercenttrue
! 3922: \else
! 3923: \ifsetpercent
! 3924: \let\go\pickupwholefraction
! 3925: \else
! 3926: \global\advance\colcount by 1
! 3927: \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
! 3928: % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
! 3929: \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
! 3930: \fi
! 3931: \fi
! 3932: \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
! 3933: % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
! 3934: % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
! 3935: \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
! 3936: \else
! 3937: \let\go = \setuptable
! 3938: \fi%
! 3939: \fi
! 3940: \go
! 3941: }
! 3942:
! 3943: % multitable-only commands.
! 3944: %
! 3945: % @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold.
! 3946: % Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group
! 3947: % of an alignment entry. \everycr resets \everytab so we don't have to
! 3948: % undo it ourselves.
! 3949: \def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable
! 3950: \def\headitem{%
! 3951: \checkenv\multitable
! 3952: \crcr
! 3953: \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs
! 3954: \the\everytab % for the first item
! 3955: }%
! 3956: %
! 3957: % A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template
! 3958: % line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until
! 3959: % we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve.
! 3960: % --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
! 3961: \def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
! 3962:
! 3963: % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
! 3964: %
! 3965: \newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab.
! 3966: %
! 3967: \envdef\multitable{%
! 3968: \vskip\parskip
! 3969: \startsavinginserts
! 3970: %
! 3971: % @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
! 3972: % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
! 3973: % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
! 3974: % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
! 3975: \def\item{\crcr}%
! 3976: %
! 3977: \tolerance=9500
! 3978: \hbadness=9500
! 3979: \setmultitablespacing
! 3980: \parskip=\multitableparskip
! 3981: \parindent=\multitableparindent
! 3982: \overfullrule=0pt
! 3983: \global\colcount=0
! 3984: %
! 3985: \everycr = {%
! 3986: \noalign{%
! 3987: \global\everytab={}%
! 3988: \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
! 3989: % Check for saved footnotes, etc.
! 3990: \checkinserts
! 3991: % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
! 3992: %\filbreak
! 3993: % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the
! 3994: % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the
! 3995: % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
! 3996: }%
! 3997: }%
! 3998: %
! 3999: \parsearg\domultitable
! 4000: }
! 4001: \def\domultitable#1{%
! 4002: % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
! 4003: \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
! 4004: %
! 4005: % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
! 4006: % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
! 4007: % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
! 4008: % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
! 4009: \halign\bgroup &%
! 4010: \global\advance\colcount by 1
! 4011: \multistrut
! 4012: \vtop{%
! 4013: % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
! 4014: \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
! 4015: %
! 4016: % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
! 4017: % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
! 4018: % the first one.
! 4019: %
! 4020: % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
! 4021: % to the width of each template entry.
! 4022: %
! 4023: % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
! 4024: % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
! 4025: % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at
! 4026: % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
! 4027: %
! 4028: % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
! 4029: \rightskip=0pt
! 4030: \ifnum\colcount=1
! 4031: % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
! 4032: \advance\hsize by\leftskip
! 4033: \else
! 4034: \ifsetpercent \else
! 4035: % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
! 4036: % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
! 4037: \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
! 4038: \fi
! 4039: % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
! 4040: \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
! 4041: \fi
! 4042: % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
! 4043: % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
! 4044: % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
! 4045: % For example:
! 4046: % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
! 4047: % @item @code{#}
! 4048: % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
! 4049: % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
! 4050: % marking characters.
! 4051: \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
! 4052: }\cr
! 4053: }
! 4054: \def\Emultitable{%
! 4055: \crcr
! 4056: \egroup % end the \halign
! 4057: \global\setpercentfalse
! 4058: }
! 4059:
! 4060: \def\setmultitablespacing{%
! 4061: \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
! 4062: %
! 4063: % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
! 4064: % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on
! 4065: % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
! 4066: % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
! 4067: \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
! 4068: \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
! 4069: \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
! 4070: \fi
! 4071: % Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
! 4072: % table. If not, do nothing.
! 4073: % If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
! 4074: \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
! 4075: \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
! 4076: \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller
! 4077: % than skip between lines in the table.
! 4078: \fi%
! 4079: \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
! 4080: \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
! 4081: \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller
! 4082: % than skip between lines in the table.
! 4083: \fi}
! 4084:
! 4085:
! 4086: \message{conditionals,}
! 4087:
! 4088: % @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
! 4089: % @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't
! 4090: % attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we
! 4091: % have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
! 4092: % attempt to close an environment group.
! 4093: %
! 4094: \def\makecond#1{%
! 4095: \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
! 4096: \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
! 4097: }
! 4098: \makecond{iftex}
! 4099: \makecond{ifnotdocbook}
! 4100: \makecond{ifnothtml}
! 4101: \makecond{ifnotinfo}
! 4102: \makecond{ifnotplaintext}
! 4103: \makecond{ifnotxml}
! 4104:
! 4105: % Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
! 4106: %
! 4107: \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
! 4108: \def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
! 4109: \def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
! 4110: \def\html{\doignore{html}}
! 4111: \def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
! 4112: \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
! 4113: \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
! 4114: \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
! 4115: \def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
! 4116: \def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
! 4117: \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
! 4118: \def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
! 4119: \def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
! 4120:
! 4121: % Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
! 4122: %
! 4123: % A count to remember the depth of nesting.
! 4124: \newcount\doignorecount
! 4125:
! 4126: \def\doignore#1{\begingroup
! 4127: % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
! 4128: \obeylines
! 4129: \catcode`\@ = \other
! 4130: \catcode`\{ = \other
! 4131: \catcode`\} = \other
! 4132: %
! 4133: % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
! 4134: \spaceisspace
! 4135: %
! 4136: % Count number of #1's that we've seen.
! 4137: \doignorecount = 0
! 4138: %
! 4139: % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
! 4140: \dodoignore{#1}%
! 4141: }
! 4142:
! 4143: { \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
! 4144: \obeylines %
! 4145: %
! 4146: \gdef\dodoignore#1{%
! 4147: % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
! 4148: %
! 4149: % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'.
! 4150: \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{%
! 4151: \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
! 4152: %
! 4153: % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
! 4154: % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
! 4155: % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
! 4156: \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
! 4157: %
! 4158: % And now expand that command.
! 4159: \doignoretext ^^M%
! 4160: }%
! 4161: }
! 4162:
! 4163: \def\doignoreyyy#1{%
! 4164: \def\temp{#1}%
! 4165: \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found.
! 4166: \let\next\doignoretextzzz
! 4167: \else % Found a nested condition, ...
! 4168: \advance\doignorecount by 1
! 4169: \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another.
! 4170: % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
! 4171: \fi
! 4172: \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
! 4173: }
! 4174:
! 4175: % We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
! 4176: %
! 4177: \def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
! 4178: \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end.
! 4179: \let\next\enddoignore
! 4180: \else % Still inside a nested condition.
! 4181: \advance\doignorecount by -1
! 4182: \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end.
! 4183: \fi
! 4184: \next
! 4185: }
! 4186:
! 4187: % Finish off ignored text.
! 4188: { \obeylines%
! 4189: % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim
! 4190: % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional
! 4191: % would result in a blank line in the output.
! 4192: \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
! 4193: }
! 4194:
! 4195:
! 4196: % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
! 4197: % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
! 4198: %
! 4199: % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
! 4200: % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
! 4201: % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
! 4202: % didn't need it.
! 4203: % We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
! 4204: %
! 4205: \parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
! 4206: \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
! 4207: {%
! 4208: \makevalueexpandable
! 4209: \def\temp{#2}%
! 4210: \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
! 4211: \ifx\temp\empty
! 4212: \next{}%
! 4213: \else
! 4214: \setzzz#2\endsetzzz
! 4215: \fi
! 4216: }%
! 4217: }
! 4218: % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
! 4219: \def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
! 4220:
! 4221: % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
! 4222: %
! 4223: \parseargdef\clear{%
! 4224: {%
! 4225: \makevalueexpandable
! 4226: \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
! 4227: }%
! 4228: }
! 4229:
! 4230: % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
! 4231: \def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
! 4232: \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
! 4233: {
! 4234: \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
! 4235: %
! 4236: \gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
! 4237: \let\value = \expandablevalue
! 4238: % We don't want these characters active, ...
! 4239: \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
! 4240: % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
! 4241: % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
! 4242: % So \let them to their normal equivalents.
! 4243: \let-\normaldash \let_\normalunderscore
! 4244: }
! 4245: }
! 4246:
! 4247: % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
! 4248: % properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies).
! 4249: % The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since
! 4250: % the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the
! 4251: % variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
! 4252: % it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
! 4253: % to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
! 4254: %
! 4255: % Unfortunately, this has the consequence that when _ is in the *value*
! 4256: % of an @set, it does not print properly in the roman fonts (get the cmr
! 4257: % dot accent at position 126 instead). No fix comes to mind, and it's
! 4258: % been this way since 2003 or earlier, so just ignore it.
! 4259: %
! 4260: \def\expandablevalue#1{%
! 4261: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
! 4262: {[No value for ``#1'']}%
! 4263: \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
! 4264: \else
! 4265: \csname SET#1\endcsname
! 4266: \fi
! 4267: }
! 4268:
! 4269: % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
! 4270: % with @set.
! 4271: %
! 4272: % To get the special treatment we need for `@end ifset,' we call
! 4273: % \makecond and then redefine.
! 4274: %
! 4275: \makecond{ifset}
! 4276: \def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
! 4277: \def\doifset#1#2{%
! 4278: {%
! 4279: \makevalueexpandable
! 4280: \let\next=\empty
! 4281: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
! 4282: #1% If not set, redefine \next.
! 4283: \fi
! 4284: \expandafter
! 4285: }\next
! 4286: }
! 4287: \def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
! 4288:
! 4289: % @ifclear VAR ... @end executes the `...' iff VAR has never been
! 4290: % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
! 4291: %
! 4292: % The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
! 4293: % above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
! 4294: % then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
! 4295: %
! 4296: \makecond{ifclear}
! 4297: \def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
! 4298: \def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
! 4299:
! 4300: % @ifcommandisdefined CMD ... @end executes the `...' if CMD (written
! 4301: % without the @) is in fact defined. We can only feasibly check at the
! 4302: % TeX level, so something like `mathcode' is going to considered
! 4303: % defined even though it is not a Texinfo command.
! 4304: %
! 4305: \makecond{ifcommanddefined}
! 4306: \def\ifcommanddefined{\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\let\next=\ifcmddefinedfail}}}
! 4307: %
! 4308: \def\doifcmddefined#1#2{{%
! 4309: \makevalueexpandable
! 4310: \let\next=\empty
! 4311: \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax
! 4312: #1% If not defined, \let\next as above.
! 4313: \fi
! 4314: \expandafter
! 4315: }\next
! 4316: }
! 4317: \def\ifcmddefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommanddefined}}
! 4318:
! 4319: % @ifcommandnotdefined CMD ... handled similar to @ifclear above.
! 4320: \makecond{ifcommandnotdefined}
! 4321: \def\ifcommandnotdefined{%
! 4322: \parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\else \let\next=\ifcmdnotdefinedfail}}}
! 4323: \def\ifcmdnotdefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommandnotdefined}}
! 4324:
! 4325: % Set the `txicommandconditionals' variable, so documents have a way to
! 4326: % test if the @ifcommand...defined conditionals are available.
! 4327: \set txicommandconditionals
! 4328:
! 4329: % @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
! 4330: % which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
! 4331: \let\dircategory=\comment
! 4332:
! 4333: % @defininfoenclose.
! 4334: \let\definfoenclose=\comment
! 4335:
! 4336:
! 4337: \message{indexing,}
! 4338: % Index generation facilities
! 4339:
! 4340: % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
! 4341: % except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
! 4342: \edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
! 4343:
! 4344: % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
! 4345: % It automatically defines \fooindex such that
! 4346: % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
! 4347: % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
! 4348: % the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo.
! 4349: % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
! 4350: % for the sake of vms.
! 4351: %
! 4352: \def\newindex#1{%
! 4353: \iflinks
! 4354: \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
! 4355: \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
! 4356: \fi
! 4357: \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index
! 4358: \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
! 4359: }
! 4360:
! 4361: % @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
! 4362: %
! 4363: \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
! 4364:
! 4365: % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
! 4366: %
! 4367: \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
! 4368: %
! 4369: \def\newcodeindex#1{%
! 4370: \iflinks
! 4371: \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
! 4372: \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
! 4373: \fi
! 4374: \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
! 4375: \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
! 4376: }
! 4377:
! 4378:
! 4379: % @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
! 4380: % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
! 4381: %
! 4382: % @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
! 4383: % inside @code.
! 4384: %
! 4385: \def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
! 4386: \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
! 4387:
! 4388: % #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
! 4389: % #3 the target index (bar).
! 4390: \def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
! 4391: % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
! 4392: % closing the target index.
! 4393: \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \relax
! 4394: % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
! 4395: % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
! 4396: \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
! 4397: \expandafter\let\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
! 4398: \fi
! 4399: % redefine \fooindfile:
! 4400: \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
! 4401: \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
! 4402: % redefine \fooindex:
! 4403: \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
! 4404: }
! 4405:
! 4406: % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
! 4407: % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
! 4408: % and it is "foo", the name of the index.
! 4409:
! 4410: % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
! 4411: % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
! 4412:
! 4413: % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
! 4414: % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
! 4415:
! 4416: \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
! 4417: \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
! 4418:
! 4419: % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
! 4420: \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
! 4421: \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
! 4422:
! 4423: % Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
! 4424: % Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
! 4425: % we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
! 4426: %
! 4427: \def\indexdummies{%
! 4428: \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files.
! 4429: \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
! 4430: \def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
! 4431: %
! 4432: % Need these unexpandable (because we define \tt as a dummy)
! 4433: % definitions when @{ or @} appear in index entry text. Also, more
! 4434: % complicated, when \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
! 4435: % We can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
! 4436: % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. Perhaps we
! 4437: % should define @lbrace and @rbrace commands a la @comma.
! 4438: \def\{{{\tt\char123}}%
! 4439: \def\}{{\tt\char125}}%
! 4440: %
! 4441: % I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is
! 4442: % generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts
! 4443: % causes processing to be prematurely terminated. This is,
! 4444: % apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput
! 4445: % is an expandable command. The redefinition below makes \endinput
! 4446: % disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that
! 4447: % processing continues to some further point. On the other hand, it
! 4448: % seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that
! 4449: % is still getting written without apparent harm.
! 4450: %
! 4451: % Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to
! 4452: % help-texinfo, 22may06):
! 4453: % @macro funindex {WORD}
! 4454: % @findex xyz
! 4455: % @end macro
! 4456: % ...
! 4457: % @funindex commtest
! 4458: %
! 4459: % The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor.
! 4460: %
! 4461: % Sample whatsit resulting:
! 4462: % .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}}
! 4463: %
! 4464: % So:
! 4465: \let\endinput = \empty
! 4466: %
! 4467: % Do the redefinitions.
! 4468: \commondummies
! 4469: }
! 4470:
! 4471: % For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to
! 4472: % redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of
! 4473: % \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @,
! 4474: % this will be simpler.
! 4475: %
! 4476: \def\atdummies{%
! 4477: \def\@{@@}%
! 4478: \def\ {@ }%
! 4479: \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
! 4480: \let\} = \rbraceatcmd
! 4481: %
! 4482: % Do the redefinitions.
! 4483: \commondummies
! 4484: \otherbackslash
! 4485: }
! 4486:
! 4487: % Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.
! 4488: %
! 4489: \def\commondummies{%
! 4490: %
! 4491: % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively
! 4492: % preventing its expansion. This is used only for control words,
! 4493: % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for
! 4494: % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
! 4495: % from whatever follows.
! 4496: %
! 4497: % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
! 4498: % space.
! 4499: %
! 4500: % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
! 4501: % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
! 4502: % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
! 4503: %
! 4504: \def\definedummyword ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}%
! 4505: \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}%
! 4506: \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
! 4507: %
! 4508: \commondummiesnofonts
! 4509: %
! 4510: \definedummyletter\_%
! 4511: \definedummyletter\-%
! 4512: %
! 4513: % Non-English letters.
! 4514: \definedummyword\AA
! 4515: \definedummyword\AE
! 4516: \definedummyword\DH
! 4517: \definedummyword\L
! 4518: \definedummyword\O
! 4519: \definedummyword\OE
! 4520: \definedummyword\TH
! 4521: \definedummyword\aa
! 4522: \definedummyword\ae
! 4523: \definedummyword\dh
! 4524: \definedummyword\exclamdown
! 4525: \definedummyword\l
! 4526: \definedummyword\o
! 4527: \definedummyword\oe
! 4528: \definedummyword\ordf
! 4529: \definedummyword\ordm
! 4530: \definedummyword\questiondown
! 4531: \definedummyword\ss
! 4532: \definedummyword\th
! 4533: %
! 4534: % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
! 4535: \definedummyword\bf
! 4536: \definedummyword\gtr
! 4537: \definedummyword\hat
! 4538: \definedummyword\less
! 4539: \definedummyword\sf
! 4540: \definedummyword\sl
! 4541: \definedummyword\tclose
! 4542: \definedummyword\tt
! 4543: %
! 4544: \definedummyword\LaTeX
! 4545: \definedummyword\TeX
! 4546: %
! 4547: % Assorted special characters.
! 4548: \definedummyword\arrow
! 4549: \definedummyword\bullet
! 4550: \definedummyword\comma
! 4551: \definedummyword\copyright
! 4552: \definedummyword\registeredsymbol
! 4553: \definedummyword\dots
! 4554: \definedummyword\enddots
! 4555: \definedummyword\entrybreak
! 4556: \definedummyword\equiv
! 4557: \definedummyword\error
! 4558: \definedummyword\euro
! 4559: \definedummyword\expansion
! 4560: \definedummyword\geq
! 4561: \definedummyword\guillemetleft
! 4562: \definedummyword\guillemetright
! 4563: \definedummyword\guilsinglleft
! 4564: \definedummyword\guilsinglright
! 4565: \definedummyword\lbracechar
! 4566: \definedummyword\leq
! 4567: \definedummyword\minus
! 4568: \definedummyword\ogonek
! 4569: \definedummyword\pounds
! 4570: \definedummyword\point
! 4571: \definedummyword\print
! 4572: \definedummyword\quotedblbase
! 4573: \definedummyword\quotedblleft
! 4574: \definedummyword\quotedblright
! 4575: \definedummyword\quoteleft
! 4576: \definedummyword\quoteright
! 4577: \definedummyword\quotesinglbase
! 4578: \definedummyword\rbracechar
! 4579: \definedummyword\result
! 4580: \definedummyword\textdegree
! 4581: %
! 4582: % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write.
! 4583: \macrolist
! 4584: %
! 4585: \normalturnoffactive
! 4586: %
! 4587: % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any
! 4588: % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
! 4589: \makevalueexpandable
! 4590: }
! 4591:
! 4592: % \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts.
! 4593: %
! 4594: \def\commondummiesnofonts{%
! 4595: % Control letters and accents.
! 4596: \definedummyletter\!%
! 4597: \definedummyaccent\"%
! 4598: \definedummyaccent\'%
! 4599: \definedummyletter\*%
! 4600: \definedummyaccent\,%
! 4601: \definedummyletter\.%
! 4602: \definedummyletter\/%
! 4603: \definedummyletter\:%
! 4604: \definedummyaccent\=%
! 4605: \definedummyletter\?%
! 4606: \definedummyaccent\^%
! 4607: \definedummyaccent\`%
! 4608: \definedummyaccent\~%
! 4609: \definedummyword\u
! 4610: \definedummyword\v
! 4611: \definedummyword\H
! 4612: \definedummyword\dotaccent
! 4613: \definedummyword\ogonek
! 4614: \definedummyword\ringaccent
! 4615: \definedummyword\tieaccent
! 4616: \definedummyword\ubaraccent
! 4617: \definedummyword\udotaccent
! 4618: \definedummyword\dotless
! 4619: %
! 4620: % Texinfo font commands.
! 4621: \definedummyword\b
! 4622: \definedummyword\i
! 4623: \definedummyword\r
! 4624: \definedummyword\sansserif
! 4625: \definedummyword\sc
! 4626: \definedummyword\slanted
! 4627: \definedummyword\t
! 4628: %
! 4629: % Commands that take arguments.
! 4630: \definedummyword\abbr
! 4631: \definedummyword\acronym
! 4632: \definedummyword\anchor
! 4633: \definedummyword\cite
! 4634: \definedummyword\code
! 4635: \definedummyword\command
! 4636: \definedummyword\dfn
! 4637: \definedummyword\dmn
! 4638: \definedummyword\email
! 4639: \definedummyword\emph
! 4640: \definedummyword\env
! 4641: \definedummyword\file
! 4642: \definedummyword\image
! 4643: \definedummyword\indicateurl
! 4644: \definedummyword\inforef
! 4645: \definedummyword\kbd
! 4646: \definedummyword\key
! 4647: \definedummyword\math
! 4648: \definedummyword\option
! 4649: \definedummyword\pxref
! 4650: \definedummyword\ref
! 4651: \definedummyword\samp
! 4652: \definedummyword\strong
! 4653: \definedummyword\tie
! 4654: \definedummyword\uref
! 4655: \definedummyword\url
! 4656: \definedummyword\var
! 4657: \definedummyword\verb
! 4658: \definedummyword\w
! 4659: \definedummyword\xref
! 4660: }
! 4661:
! 4662: % \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
! 4663: % by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all
! 4664: % control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
! 4665: % would be for a given command (usually its argument).
! 4666: %
! 4667: \def\indexnofonts{%
! 4668: % Accent commands should become @asis.
! 4669: \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}%
! 4670: % We can just ignore other control letters.
! 4671: \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}%
! 4672: % All control words become @asis by default; overrides below.
! 4673: \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent
! 4674: %
! 4675: \commondummiesnofonts
! 4676: %
! 4677: % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
! 4678: % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
! 4679: % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
! 4680: %\let\tt=\asis
! 4681: %
! 4682: \def\ { }%
! 4683: \def\@{@}%
! 4684: \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
! 4685: \def\-{}% @- shouldn't affect sorting
! 4686: %
! 4687: % Unfortunately, texindex is not prepared to handle braces in the
! 4688: % content at all. So for index sorting, we map @{ and @} to strings
! 4689: % starting with |, since that ASCII character is between ASCII { and }.
! 4690: \def\{{|a}%
! 4691: \def\lbracechar{|a}%
! 4692: %
! 4693: \def\}{|b}%
! 4694: \def\rbracechar{|b}%
! 4695: %
! 4696: % Non-English letters.
! 4697: \def\AA{AA}%
! 4698: \def\AE{AE}%
! 4699: \def\DH{DZZ}%
! 4700: \def\L{L}%
! 4701: \def\OE{OE}%
! 4702: \def\O{O}%
! 4703: \def\TH{ZZZ}%
! 4704: \def\aa{aa}%
! 4705: \def\ae{ae}%
! 4706: \def\dh{dzz}%
! 4707: \def\exclamdown{!}%
! 4708: \def\l{l}%
! 4709: \def\oe{oe}%
! 4710: \def\ordf{a}%
! 4711: \def\ordm{o}%
! 4712: \def\o{o}%
! 4713: \def\questiondown{?}%
! 4714: \def\ss{ss}%
! 4715: \def\th{zzz}%
! 4716: %
! 4717: \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
! 4718: \def\TeX{TeX}%
! 4719: %
! 4720: % Assorted special characters.
! 4721: % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.)
! 4722: \def\arrow{->}%
! 4723: \def\bullet{bullet}%
! 4724: \def\comma{,}%
! 4725: \def\copyright{copyright}%
! 4726: \def\dots{...}%
! 4727: \def\enddots{...}%
! 4728: \def\equiv{==}%
! 4729: \def\error{error}%
! 4730: \def\euro{euro}%
! 4731: \def\expansion{==>}%
! 4732: \def\geq{>=}%
! 4733: \def\guillemetleft{<<}%
! 4734: \def\guillemetright{>>}%
! 4735: \def\guilsinglleft{<}%
! 4736: \def\guilsinglright{>}%
! 4737: \def\leq{<=}%
! 4738: \def\minus{-}%
! 4739: \def\point{.}%
! 4740: \def\pounds{pounds}%
! 4741: \def\print{-|}%
! 4742: \def\quotedblbase{"}%
! 4743: \def\quotedblleft{"}%
! 4744: \def\quotedblright{"}%
! 4745: \def\quoteleft{`}%
! 4746: \def\quoteright{'}%
! 4747: \def\quotesinglbase{,}%
! 4748: \def\registeredsymbol{R}%
! 4749: \def\result{=>}%
! 4750: \def\textdegree{o}%
! 4751: %
! 4752: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlquoteignore\endcsname\relax
! 4753: \else \indexlquoteignore \fi
! 4754: %
! 4755: % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present).
! 4756: % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now.
! 4757: % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up
! 4758: % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry
! 4759: % that starts with \.
! 4760: %
! 4761: % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
! 4762: % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that
! 4763: % goes to end-of-line is not handled.
! 4764: %
! 4765: \macrolist
! 4766: }
! 4767:
! 4768: % Undocumented (for FSFS 2nd ed.): @set txiindexlquoteignore makes us
! 4769: % ignore left quotes in the sort term.
! 4770: {\catcode`\`=\active
! 4771: \gdef\indexlquoteignore{\let`=\empty}}
! 4772:
! 4773: \let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex.
! 4774: \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
! 4775:
! 4776: % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
! 4777: % #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
! 4778: \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}
! 4779:
! 4780: % Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
! 4781: % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
! 4782: % empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
! 4783: % is with most defuns, which call us directly).
! 4784: %
! 4785: \def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
! 4786: \iflinks
! 4787: {%
! 4788: % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
! 4789: \toks0 = {#2}%
! 4790: % If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
! 4791: \def\thirdarg{#3}%
! 4792: \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else
! 4793: \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
! 4794: \fi
! 4795: %
! 4796: \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
! 4797: %
! 4798: \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite
! 4799: }%
! 4800: \fi
! 4801: }
! 4802:
! 4803: % Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file:
! 4804: %
! 4805: \def\dosubindwrite{%
! 4806: % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
! 4807: \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
! 4808: \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}%
! 4809: \fi
! 4810: %
! 4811: % Remember, we are within a group.
! 4812: \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
! 4813: \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
! 4814: % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
! 4815: %
! 4816: % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
! 4817: % get the string to sort by.
! 4818: {\indexnofonts
! 4819: \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
! 4820: \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
! 4821: }%
! 4822: %
! 4823: % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
! 4824: % the original text, including any font commands. We write
! 4825: % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
! 4826: % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
! 4827: % sorted result.
! 4828: \edef\temp{%
! 4829: \write\writeto{%
! 4830: \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
! 4831: }%
! 4832: \temp
! 4833: }
! 4834:
! 4835: % Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit:
! 4836: %
! 4837: % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
! 4838: % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
! 4839: % the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
! 4840: % \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that
! 4841: % sequences like this:
! 4842: % @end defun
! 4843: % @tindex whatever
! 4844: % @defun ...
! 4845: % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
! 4846: % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
! 4847: % the previous defun.
! 4848: %
! 4849: % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
! 4850: % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
! 4851: %
! 4852: % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
! 4853: %
! 4854: % But wait, there is a catch there:
! 4855: % We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not
! 4856: % sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
! 4857: % of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual
! 4858: % representation of the skip.
! 4859: %
! 4860: % The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
! 4861: % the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
! 4862: %
! 4863: \edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
! 4864: %
! 4865: \newskip\whatsitskip
! 4866: \newcount\whatsitpenalty
! 4867: %
! 4868: % ..., ready, GO:
! 4869: %
! 4870: \def\safewhatsit#1{\ifhmode
! 4871: #1%
! 4872: \else
! 4873: % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
! 4874: \whatsitskip = \lastskip
! 4875: \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
! 4876: \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty
! 4877: %
! 4878: % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
! 4879: % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this
! 4880: % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a
! 4881: % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
! 4882: % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
! 4883: \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
! 4884: \else
! 4885: \vskip-\whatsitskip
! 4886: \fi
! 4887: %
! 4888: #1%
! 4889: %
! 4890: \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
! 4891: % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
! 4892: % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want
! 4893: % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
! 4894: % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
! 4895: % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example:
! 4896: % @deffn deffn-whatever
! 4897: % @vindex index-whatever
! 4898: % Description.
! 4899: % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
! 4900: % and the "Description." paragraph.
! 4901: \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi
! 4902: \else
! 4903: % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
! 4904: % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
! 4905: % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
! 4906: \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip
! 4907: \fi
! 4908: \fi}
! 4909:
! 4910: % The index entry written in the file actually looks like
! 4911: % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
! 4912: % or
! 4913: % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
! 4914: % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
! 4915: % containing these kinds of lines:
! 4916: % \initial {c}
! 4917: % before the first topic whose initial is c
! 4918: % \entry {topic}{pagelist}
! 4919: % for a topic that is used without subtopics
! 4920: % \primary {topic}
! 4921: % for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
! 4922: % \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
! 4923: % for each subtopic.
! 4924:
! 4925: % Define the user-accessible indexing commands
! 4926: % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
! 4927:
! 4928: \def\findex {\fnindex}
! 4929: \def\kindex {\kyindex}
! 4930: \def\cindex {\cpindex}
! 4931: \def\vindex {\vrindex}
! 4932: \def\tindex {\tpindex}
! 4933: \def\pindex {\pgindex}
! 4934:
! 4935: \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
! 4936: {\obeylines %
! 4937: \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
! 4938: \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
! 4939:
! 4940: % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
! 4941:
! 4942: % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
! 4943: % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
! 4944: %
! 4945: \parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
! 4946: \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
! 4947: %
! 4948: \smallfonts \rm
! 4949: \tolerance = 9500
! 4950: \plainfrenchspacing
! 4951: \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
! 4952: %
! 4953: % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
! 4954: % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
! 4955: % \initial {@}
! 4956: % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
! 4957: % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
! 4958: \catcode`\@ = 11
! 4959: \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
! 4960: \ifeof 1
! 4961: % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
! 4962: % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
! 4963: % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
! 4964: % there is some text.
! 4965: \putwordIndexNonexistent
! 4966: \else
! 4967: %
! 4968: % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
! 4969: % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
! 4970: % it can discover if there is anything in it.
! 4971: \read 1 to \temp
! 4972: \ifeof 1
! 4973: \putwordIndexIsEmpty
! 4974: \else
! 4975: % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
! 4976: % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
! 4977: % to make right now.
! 4978: \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}%
! 4979: \catcode`\\ = 0
! 4980: \escapechar = `\\
! 4981: \begindoublecolumns
! 4982: \input \jobname.#1s
! 4983: \enddoublecolumns
! 4984: \fi
! 4985: \fi
! 4986: \closein 1
! 4987: \endgroup}
! 4988:
! 4989: % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
! 4990: % Change them to control the appearance of the index.
! 4991:
! 4992: \def\initial#1{{%
! 4993: % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
! 4994: \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
! 4995: %
! 4996: % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
! 4997: \removelastskip
! 4998: %
! 4999: % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
! 5000: \nobreak
! 5001: \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip
! 5002: \penalty 0
! 5003: \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip
! 5004: %
! 5005: % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of
! 5006: % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
! 5007: % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
! 5008: % we need before each entry, but it's better.
! 5009: %
! 5010: % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
! 5011: \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
! 5012: \leftline{\secbf #1}%
! 5013: % Do our best not to break after the initial.
! 5014: \nobreak
! 5015: \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
! 5016: }}
! 5017:
! 5018: % \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
! 5019: % then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index
! 5020: % and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
! 5021: %
! 5022: % A straightforward implementation would start like this:
! 5023: % \def\entry#1#2{...
! 5024: % But this freezes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to
! 5025: % @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge---
! 5026: % ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right.
! 5027: % The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text.
! 5028: % --kasal, 21nov03
! 5029: \def\entry{%
! 5030: \begingroup
! 5031: %
! 5032: % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
! 5033: % affect previous text.
! 5034: \par
! 5035: %
! 5036: % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
! 5037: \parfillskip = 0in
! 5038: %
! 5039: % No extra space above this paragraph.
! 5040: \parskip = 0in
! 5041: %
! 5042: % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
! 5043: \finalhyphendemerits = 0
! 5044: %
! 5045: % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
! 5046: % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the
! 5047: % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large
! 5048: % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
! 5049: % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
! 5050: %
! 5051: % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
! 5052: % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
! 5053: \hangindent = 2em
! 5054: %
! 5055: % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
! 5056: % with blank space.
! 5057: \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
! 5058: %
! 5059: % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing
! 5060: % columns.
! 5061: \vskip 0pt plus1pt
! 5062: %
! 5063: % When reading the text of entry, convert explicit line breaks
! 5064: % from @* into spaces. The user might give these in long section
! 5065: % titles, for instance.
! 5066: \def\*{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
! 5067: \def\entrybreak{\hfil\break}%
! 5068: %
! 5069: % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
! 5070: \afterassignment\doentry
! 5071: \let\temp =
! 5072: }
! 5073: \def\entrybreak{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
! 5074: \def\doentry{%
! 5075: \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
! 5076: \noindent
! 5077: \aftergroup\finishentry
! 5078: % And now comes the text of the entry.
! 5079: }
! 5080: \def\finishentry#1{%
! 5081: % #1 is the page number.
! 5082: %
! 5083: % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
! 5084: % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be
! 5085: % cursed by a Unix daemon.
! 5086: \setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}%
! 5087: \ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt
! 5088: \ %
! 5089: \else
! 5090: %
! 5091: % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
! 5092: % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
! 5093: % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
! 5094: \hfil\penalty50
! 5095: \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
! 5096: %
! 5097: % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
! 5098: % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull
! 5099: % \hbox ensues.
! 5100: \ifpdf
! 5101: \pdfgettoks#1.%
! 5102: \ \the\toksA
! 5103: \else
! 5104: \ #1%
! 5105: \fi
! 5106: \fi
! 5107: \par
! 5108: \endgroup
! 5109: }
! 5110:
! 5111: % Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em.
! 5112: \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
! 5113: \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
! 5114:
! 5115: \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
! 5116:
! 5117: \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
! 5118: \def\secondary#1#2{{%
! 5119: \parfillskip=0in
! 5120: \parskip=0in
! 5121: \hangindent=1in
! 5122: \hangafter=1
! 5123: \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
! 5124: \ifpdf
! 5125: \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
! 5126: \else
! 5127: #2
! 5128: \fi
! 5129: \par
! 5130: }}
! 5131:
! 5132: % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
! 5133: % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
! 5134: % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
! 5135: \catcode`\@=11
! 5136:
! 5137: \newbox\partialpage
! 5138: \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
! 5139:
! 5140: \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
! 5141: % Grab any single-column material above us.
! 5142: \output = {%
! 5143: %
! 5144: % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
! 5145: % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
! 5146: % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
! 5147: % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In
! 5148: % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
! 5149: % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
! 5150: % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case.
! 5151: \ifvoid\partialpage \else
! 5152: \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
! 5153: \fi
! 5154: %
! 5155: \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
! 5156: % Unvbox the main output page.
! 5157: \unvbox\PAGE
! 5158: \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
! 5159: }%
! 5160: }%
! 5161: \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
! 5162: %
! 5163: % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
! 5164: \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
! 5165: %
! 5166: % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this
! 5167: % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
! 5168: % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple
! 5169: % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
! 5170: % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
! 5171: %
! 5172: % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
! 5173: % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
! 5174: % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant
! 5175: % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
! 5176: % as it did when we hard-coded it.
! 5177: %
! 5178: % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
! 5179: % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
! 5180: % been clobbered.
! 5181: %
! 5182: \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
! 5183: \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
! 5184: \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
! 5185: \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
! 5186: %
! 5187: % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here,
! 5188: % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
! 5189: \vsize = 2\vsize
! 5190: }
! 5191:
! 5192: % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
! 5193: % the last.
! 5194: %
! 5195: \def\doublecolumnout{%
! 5196: \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
! 5197: % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
! 5198: % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
! 5199: % previous page.
! 5200: \dimen@ = \vsize
! 5201: \divide\dimen@ by 2
! 5202: \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
! 5203: %
! 5204: % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
! 5205: \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
! 5206: \onepageout\pagesofar
! 5207: \unvbox255
! 5208: \penalty\outputpenalty
! 5209: }
! 5210: %
! 5211: % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
! 5212: % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
! 5213: \def\pagesofar{%
! 5214: \unvbox\partialpage
! 5215: %
! 5216: \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
! 5217: \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
! 5218: \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
! 5219: }
! 5220: %
! 5221: % All done with double columns.
! 5222: \def\enddoublecolumns{%
! 5223: % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised
! 5224: % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the
! 5225: % following situation:
! 5226: %
! 5227: % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry.
! 5228: % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no
! 5229: % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last
! 5230: % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not
! 5231: % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following
! 5232: % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject
! 5233: % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output
! 5234: % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last
! 5235: % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which
! 5236: % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with
! 5237: % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as
! 5238: % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page
! 5239: % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the
! 5240: % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page
! 5241: % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final
! 5242: % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after
! 5243: % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns
! 5244: % and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see
! 5245: % \pagebody), causing an overfull box.
! 5246: %
! 5247: % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the
! 5248: % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281).
! 5249: \penalty0
! 5250: %
! 5251: \output = {%
! 5252: % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the
! 5253: % current page, no automatic page break.
! 5254: \balancecolumns
! 5255: %
! 5256: % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
! 5257: % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
! 5258: % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
! 5259: % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal
! 5260: % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
! 5261: % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
! 5262: % the output somewhat more palatable.)
! 5263: \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
! 5264: }%
! 5265: \eject
! 5266: \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
! 5267: %
! 5268: % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
! 5269: % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column
! 5270: % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
! 5271: % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
! 5272: \pagegoal = \vsize
! 5273: }
! 5274: %
! 5275: % Called at the end of the double column material.
! 5276: \def\balancecolumns{%
! 5277: \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
! 5278: \dimen@ = \ht0
! 5279: \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
! 5280: \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
! 5281: \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
! 5282: %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
! 5283: \splittopskip = \topskip
! 5284: % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
! 5285: {%
! 5286: \vbadness = 10000
! 5287: \loop
! 5288: \global\setbox3 = \copy0
! 5289: \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
! 5290: \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
! 5291: \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
! 5292: \repeat
! 5293: }%
! 5294: %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
! 5295: \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
! 5296: \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
! 5297: %
! 5298: \pagesofar
! 5299: }
! 5300: \catcode`\@ = \other
! 5301:
! 5302:
! 5303: \message{sectioning,}
! 5304: % Chapters, sections, etc.
! 5305:
! 5306: % Let's start with @part.
! 5307: \outer\parseargdef\part{\partzzz{#1}}
! 5308: \def\partzzz#1{%
! 5309: \chapoddpage
! 5310: \null
! 5311: \vskip.3\vsize % move it down on the page a bit
! 5312: \begingroup
! 5313: \noindent \titlefonts\rmisbold #1\par % the text
! 5314: \let\lastnode=\empty % no node to associate with
! 5315: \writetocentry{part}{#1}{}% but put it in the toc
! 5316: \headingsoff % no headline or footline on the part page
! 5317: \chapoddpage
! 5318: \endgroup
! 5319: }
! 5320:
! 5321: % \unnumberedno is an oxymoron. But we count the unnumbered
! 5322: % sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
! 5323: % outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter
! 5324: % numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000
! 5325: % chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
! 5326: \newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
! 5327: \newcount\chapno
! 5328: \newcount\secno \secno=0
! 5329: \newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0
! 5330: \newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0
! 5331:
! 5332: % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
! 5333: \newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@
! 5334: %
! 5335: % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
! 5336: % We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
! 5337: % construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
! 5338: % letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
! 5339: %
! 5340: \def\appendixletter{%
! 5341: \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
! 5342: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
! 5343: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
! 5344: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
! 5345: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
! 5346: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
! 5347: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
! 5348: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
! 5349: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
! 5350: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
! 5351: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
! 5352: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
! 5353: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
! 5354: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
! 5355: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
! 5356: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
! 5357: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
! 5358: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
! 5359: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
! 5360: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
! 5361: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
! 5362: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
! 5363: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
! 5364: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
! 5365: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
! 5366: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
! 5367: % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
! 5368: % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not
! 5369: % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
! 5370: % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
! 5371: \else\char\the\appendixno
! 5372: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
! 5373: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
! 5374:
! 5375: % Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number
! 5376: % and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use
! 5377: % these. @section does likewise.
! 5378: \def\thischapter{}
! 5379: \def\thischapternum{}
! 5380: \def\thischaptername{}
! 5381: \def\thissection{}
! 5382: \def\thissectionnum{}
! 5383: \def\thissectionname{}
! 5384:
! 5385: \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
! 5386: \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
! 5387:
! 5388: % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
! 5389: \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
! 5390: \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
! 5391:
! 5392: % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
! 5393: \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
! 5394: \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
! 5395:
! 5396: % we only have subsub.
! 5397: \chardef\maxseclevel = 3
! 5398: %
! 5399: % A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
! 5400: % To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
! 5401: \chardef\unnlevel = \maxseclevel
! 5402: %
! 5403: % Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
! 5404: % \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
! 5405: \def\chapheadtype{N}
! 5406:
! 5407: % Choose a heading macro
! 5408: % #1 is heading type
! 5409: % #2 is heading level
! 5410: % #3 is text for heading
! 5411: \def\genhead#1#2#3{%
! 5412: % Compute the abs. sec. level:
! 5413: \absseclevel=#2
! 5414: \advance\absseclevel by \secbase
! 5415: % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
! 5416: \ifnum \absseclevel < 0
! 5417: \absseclevel = 0
! 5418: \else
! 5419: \ifnum \absseclevel > 3
! 5420: \absseclevel = 3
! 5421: \fi
! 5422: \fi
! 5423: % The heading type:
! 5424: \def\headtype{#1}%
! 5425: \if \headtype U%
! 5426: \ifnum \absseclevel < \unnlevel
! 5427: \chardef\unnlevel = \absseclevel
! 5428: \fi
! 5429: \else
! 5430: % Check for appendix sections:
! 5431: \ifnum \absseclevel = 0
! 5432: \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
! 5433: \else
! 5434: \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
! 5435: \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
! 5436: \fi\fi
! 5437: \fi
! 5438: % Check for numbered within unnumbered:
! 5439: \ifnum \absseclevel > \unnlevel
! 5440: \def\headtype{U}%
! 5441: \else
! 5442: \chardef\unnlevel = 3
! 5443: \fi
! 5444: \fi
! 5445: % Now print the heading:
! 5446: \if \headtype U%
! 5447: \ifcase\absseclevel
! 5448: \unnumberedzzz{#3}%
! 5449: \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
! 5450: \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
! 5451: \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
! 5452: \fi
! 5453: \else
! 5454: \if \headtype A%
! 5455: \ifcase\absseclevel
! 5456: \appendixzzz{#3}%
! 5457: \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
! 5458: \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
! 5459: \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
! 5460: \fi
! 5461: \else
! 5462: \ifcase\absseclevel
! 5463: \chapterzzz{#3}%
! 5464: \or \seczzz{#3}%
! 5465: \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
! 5466: \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
! 5467: \fi
! 5468: \fi
! 5469: \fi
! 5470: \suppressfirstparagraphindent
! 5471: }
! 5472:
! 5473: % an interface:
! 5474: \def\numhead{\genhead N}
! 5475: \def\apphead{\genhead A}
! 5476: \def\unnmhead{\genhead U}
! 5477:
! 5478: % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset
! 5479: % all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
! 5480: %
! 5481: % Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
! 5482: % (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
! 5483: \let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
! 5484: %
! 5485: \outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
! 5486: \def\chapterzzz#1{%
! 5487: % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
! 5488: % as an @include file.
! 5489: \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
! 5490: \global\advance\chapno by 1
! 5491: %
! 5492: % Used for \float.
! 5493: \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
! 5494: \resetallfloatnos
! 5495: %
! 5496: % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations.
! 5497: \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}%
! 5498: \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}%
! 5499: %
! 5500: % Write the actual heading.
! 5501: \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
! 5502: %
! 5503: % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
! 5504: \global\let\section = \numberedsec
! 5505: \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
! 5506: \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
! 5507: }
! 5508:
! 5509: \outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz
! 5510: %
! 5511: \def\appendixzzz#1{%
! 5512: \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
! 5513: \global\advance\appendixno by 1
! 5514: \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
! 5515: \resetallfloatnos
! 5516: %
! 5517: % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations.
! 5518: \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}%
! 5519: \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}%
! 5520: %
! 5521: \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
! 5522: %
! 5523: \global\let\section = \appendixsec
! 5524: \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
! 5525: \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
! 5526: }
! 5527:
! 5528: % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz:
! 5529: \outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}}
! 5530: \def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
! 5531: \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
! 5532: \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
! 5533: %
! 5534: % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
! 5535: \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
! 5536: \resetallfloatnos
! 5537: %
! 5538: % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
! 5539: % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
! 5540: % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
! 5541: % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
! 5542: % to be executed, not expanded).
! 5543: %
! 5544: % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
! 5545: % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
! 5546: % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
! 5547: % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for
! 5548: % the toc entries.)
! 5549: \toks0 = {#1}%
! 5550: \message{(\the\toks0)}%
! 5551: %
! 5552: \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
! 5553: %
! 5554: \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
! 5555: \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
! 5556: \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
! 5557: }
! 5558:
! 5559: % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
! 5560: \outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
! 5561: % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break
! 5562: % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level.
! 5563: % Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04
! 5564: \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
! 5565: \unnmhead0{#1}%
! 5566: \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
! 5567: }
! 5568:
! 5569: % @top is like @unnumbered.
! 5570: \let\top\unnumbered
! 5571:
! 5572: % Sections.
! 5573: %
! 5574: \outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
! 5575: \def\seczzz#1{%
! 5576: \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
! 5577: \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
! 5578: }
! 5579:
! 5580: % normally calls appendixsectionzzz:
! 5581: \outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}}
! 5582: \def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
! 5583: \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
! 5584: \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
! 5585: }
! 5586: \let\appendixsec\appendixsection
! 5587:
! 5588: % normally calls unnumberedseczzz:
! 5589: \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}}
! 5590: \def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
! 5591: \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
! 5592: \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
! 5593: }
! 5594:
! 5595: % Subsections.
! 5596: %
! 5597: % normally calls numberedsubseczzz:
! 5598: \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}}
! 5599: \def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
! 5600: \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
! 5601: \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
! 5602: }
! 5603:
! 5604: % normally calls appendixsubseczzz:
! 5605: \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}}
! 5606: \def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
! 5607: \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
! 5608: \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
! 5609: {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
! 5610: }
! 5611:
! 5612: % normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz:
! 5613: \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}}
! 5614: \def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
! 5615: \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
! 5616: \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
! 5617: {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
! 5618: }
! 5619:
! 5620: % Subsubsections.
! 5621: %
! 5622: % normally numberedsubsubseczzz:
! 5623: \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}}
! 5624: \def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
! 5625: \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
! 5626: \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
! 5627: {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
! 5628: }
! 5629:
! 5630: % normally appendixsubsubseczzz:
! 5631: \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}}
! 5632: \def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
! 5633: \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
! 5634: \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
! 5635: {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
! 5636: }
! 5637:
! 5638: % normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz:
! 5639: \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}}
! 5640: \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
! 5641: \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
! 5642: \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
! 5643: {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
! 5644: }
! 5645:
! 5646: % These macros control what the section commands do, according
! 5647: % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
! 5648: % Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
! 5649: \let\section = \numberedsec
! 5650: \let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
! 5651: \let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
! 5652:
! 5653: % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
! 5654:
! 5655: \def\majorheading{%
! 5656: {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
! 5657: \parsearg\chapheadingzzz
! 5658: }
! 5659:
! 5660: \def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
! 5661: \def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
! 5662: \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
! 5663: \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak
! 5664: \suppressfirstparagraphindent
! 5665: }
! 5666:
! 5667: % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
! 5668: \parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
! 5669: \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
! 5670: \parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
! 5671: \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
! 5672: \parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
! 5673: \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
! 5674:
! 5675: % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
! 5676: % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
! 5677: % given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
! 5678:
! 5679: % Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
! 5680: \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
! 5681:
! 5682: % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
! 5683: \newskip\chapheadingskip
! 5684:
! 5685: % Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it.
! 5686: \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
! 5687: \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
! 5688: % Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will
! 5689: % get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't
! 5690: % care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page.
! 5691: \def\chapoddpage{%
! 5692: \chappager
! 5693: \ifodd\pageno \else
! 5694: \begingroup
! 5695: \headingsoff
! 5696: \null
! 5697: \chappager
! 5698: \endgroup
! 5699: \fi
! 5700: }
! 5701:
! 5702: \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
! 5703:
! 5704: \def\CHAPPAGoff{%
! 5705: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
! 5706: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
! 5707: \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
! 5708:
! 5709: \def\CHAPPAGon{%
! 5710: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
! 5711: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
! 5712: \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
! 5713: \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
! 5714:
! 5715: \def\CHAPPAGodd{%
! 5716: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
! 5717: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
! 5718: \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
! 5719: \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
! 5720:
! 5721: \CHAPPAGon
! 5722:
! 5723: % Chapter opening.
! 5724: %
! 5725: % #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
! 5726: % Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
! 5727: %
! 5728: % To test against our argument.
! 5729: \def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
! 5730: \def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
! 5731: \def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
! 5732: %
! 5733: \def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
! 5734: % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
! 5735: \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
! 5736: \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
! 5737: \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
! 5738: \gdef\thissection{}}%
! 5739: %
! 5740: \def\temptype{#2}%
! 5741: \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
! 5742: \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
! 5743: \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}%
! 5744: \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
! 5745: \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
! 5746: \gdef\thischapter{}}%
! 5747: \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
! 5748: \toks0={#1}%
! 5749: \xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
! 5750: \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
! 5751: \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}%
! 5752: % \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible
! 5753: % commands in some of the translations.
! 5754: \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{}
! 5755: \noexpand\thischapternum:
! 5756: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
! 5757: }%
! 5758: \else
! 5759: \toks0={#1}%
! 5760: \xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
! 5761: \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
! 5762: \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}%
! 5763: % \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible
! 5764: % commands in some of the translations.
! 5765: \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{}
! 5766: \noexpand\thischapternum:
! 5767: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
! 5768: }%
! 5769: \fi\fi\fi
! 5770: %
! 5771: % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
! 5772: % the preceding space.
! 5773: \safewhatsit\domark
! 5774: %
! 5775: % Insert the chapter heading break.
! 5776: \pchapsepmacro
! 5777: %
! 5778: % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
! 5779: % between here and the heading.
! 5780: \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
! 5781: \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
! 5782: \domark
! 5783: %
! 5784: {%
! 5785: \chapfonts \rmisbold
! 5786: %
! 5787: % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the
! 5788: % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called
! 5789: % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
! 5790: \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
! 5791: %
! 5792: % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
! 5793: % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
! 5794: \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
! 5795: \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
! 5796: \def\toctype{unnchap}%
! 5797: \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
! 5798: \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
! 5799: \def\toctype{omit}%
! 5800: \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
! 5801: \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
! 5802: \def\toctype{app}%
! 5803: \else
! 5804: \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
! 5805: \def\toctype{numchap}%
! 5806: \fi\fi\fi
! 5807: %
! 5808: % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the
! 5809: % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
! 5810: % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
! 5811: \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
! 5812: %
! 5813: % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
! 5814: % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
! 5815: % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
! 5816: % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
! 5817: % being visible, for instance under high magnification.
! 5818: \donoderef{#2}%
! 5819: %
! 5820: % Typeset the actual heading.
! 5821: \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue.
! 5822: \vbox{\raggedtitlesettings \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
! 5823: \unhbox0 #1\par}%
! 5824: }%
! 5825: \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
! 5826: \nobreak
! 5827: }
! 5828:
! 5829: % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
! 5830: \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
! 5831: \def\centerparameters{%
! 5832: \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
! 5833: \leftskip = \rightskip
! 5834: \parfillskip = 0pt
! 5835: }
! 5836:
! 5837:
! 5838: % I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not
! 5839: % updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03.
! 5840: %
! 5841: \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
! 5842: %
! 5843: \def\unnchfopen #1{%
! 5844: \chapoddpage
! 5845: \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
! 5846: \nobreak\bigskip\nobreak
! 5847: }
! 5848: \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
! 5849: \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
! 5850: \par\penalty 5000 %
! 5851: }
! 5852: \def\centerchfopen #1{%
! 5853: \chapoddpage
! 5854: \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings \hfill #1\hfill}%
! 5855: \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak
! 5856: }
! 5857: \def\CHAPFopen{%
! 5858: \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
! 5859: \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
! 5860:
! 5861:
! 5862: % Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and
! 5863: % call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
! 5864: %
! 5865: \newskip\secheadingskip
! 5866: \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
! 5867:
! 5868: % Subsection titles.
! 5869: \newskip\subsecheadingskip
! 5870: \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
! 5871:
! 5872: % Subsubsection titles.
! 5873: \def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
! 5874: \def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
! 5875:
! 5876:
! 5877: % Print any size, any type, section title.
! 5878: %
! 5879: % #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is
! 5880: % the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the
! 5881: % section number.
! 5882: %
! 5883: \def\seckeyword{sec}
! 5884: %
! 5885: \def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
! 5886: {%
! 5887: \checkenv{}% should not be in an environment.
! 5888: %
! 5889: % Switch to the right set of fonts.
! 5890: \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rmisbold
! 5891: %
! 5892: \def\sectionlevel{#2}%
! 5893: \def\temptype{#3}%
! 5894: %
! 5895: % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
! 5896: \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
! 5897: \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
! 5898: \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
! 5899: \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
! 5900: \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}%
! 5901: \fi
! 5902: \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
! 5903: % Don't redefine \thissection.
! 5904: \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
! 5905: \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
! 5906: \toks0={#1}%
! 5907: \xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
! 5908: \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
! 5909: \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
! 5910: % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
! 5911: % commands in some of the translations.
! 5912: \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
! 5913: \noexpand\thissectionnum:
! 5914: \noexpand\thissectionname}%
! 5915: }%
! 5916: \fi
! 5917: \else
! 5918: \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
! 5919: \toks0={#1}%
! 5920: \xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
! 5921: \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
! 5922: \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
! 5923: % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
! 5924: % commands in some of the translations.
! 5925: \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
! 5926: \noexpand\thissectionnum:
! 5927: \noexpand\thissectionname}%
! 5928: }%
! 5929: \fi
! 5930: \fi\fi\fi
! 5931: %
! 5932: % Go into vertical mode. Usually we'll already be there, but we
! 5933: % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph
! 5934: % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line.
! 5935: \par
! 5936: %
! 5937: % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
! 5938: % the preceding space.
! 5939: \safewhatsit\domark
! 5940: %
! 5941: % Insert space above the heading.
! 5942: \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
! 5943: %
! 5944: % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
! 5945: % between here and the heading.
! 5946: \global\let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
! 5947: \domark
! 5948: %
! 5949: % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
! 5950: \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
! 5951: \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
! 5952: \def\toctype{unn}%
! 5953: \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
! 5954: \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
! 5955: % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
! 5956: % and don't redefine \lastsection.
! 5957: \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
! 5958: \def\toctype{omit}%
! 5959: \let\sectionlevel=\empty
! 5960: \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
! 5961: \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
! 5962: \def\toctype{app}%
! 5963: \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
! 5964: \else
! 5965: \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
! 5966: \def\toctype{num}%
! 5967: \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
! 5968: \fi\fi\fi
! 5969: %
! 5970: % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro.
! 5971: \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
! 5972: %
! 5973: % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
! 5974: % Again, see comments in \chapmacro.
! 5975: \donoderef{#3}%
! 5976: %
! 5977: % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed.
! 5978: % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be
! 5979: % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the
! 5980: % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that
! 5981: % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the
! 5982: % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000.
! 5983: \nobreak
! 5984: %
! 5985: % Output the actual section heading.
! 5986: \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright
! 5987: \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number
! 5988: \unhbox0 #1}%
! 5989: }%
! 5990: % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
! 5991: % Don't allow stretch, though.
! 5992: \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
! 5993: %
! 5994: % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
! 5995: % was followed by glue.
! 5996: \nobreak
! 5997: %
! 5998: % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
! 5999: % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
! 6000: % discardable item.) However, when a paragraph is not started next
! 6001: % (\startdefun, \cartouche, \center, etc.), this needs to be wiped out
! 6002: % or the negative glue will cause weirdly wrong output, typically
! 6003: % obscuring the section heading with something else.
! 6004: \vskip-\parskip
! 6005: %
! 6006: % This is so the last item on the main vertical list is a known
! 6007: % \penalty > 10000, so \startdefun, etc., can recognize the situation
! 6008: % and do the needful.
! 6009: \penalty 10001
! 6010: }
! 6011:
! 6012:
! 6013: \message{toc,}
! 6014: % Table of contents.
! 6015: \newwrite\tocfile
! 6016:
! 6017: % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
! 6018: % Called from @chapter, etc.
! 6019: %
! 6020: % Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
! 6021: % We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
! 6022: % arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
! 6023: % read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
! 6024: % destination to jump to.
! 6025: %
! 6026: % We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
! 6027: % any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
! 6028: % But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the
! 6029: % table of contents chapter openings themselves.
! 6030: %
! 6031: \newif\iftocfileopened
! 6032: \def\omitkeyword{omit}%
! 6033: %
! 6034: \def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
! 6035: \edef\writetoctype{#1}%
! 6036: \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
! 6037: \iftocfileopened\else
! 6038: \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
! 6039: \global\tocfileopenedtrue
! 6040: \fi
! 6041: %
! 6042: \iflinks
! 6043: {\atdummies
! 6044: \edef\temp{%
! 6045: \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
! 6046: \temp
! 6047: }%
! 6048: \fi
! 6049: \fi
! 6050: %
! 6051: % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
! 6052: % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't
! 6053: % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
! 6054: % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
! 6055: % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named
! 6056: % `1', and two named `2'.
! 6057: \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
! 6058: }
! 6059:
! 6060:
! 6061: % These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman
! 6062: % fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant
! 6063: % with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file.
! 6064: %
! 6065: \def\activecatcodes{%
! 6066: \catcode`\"=\active
! 6067: \catcode`\$=\active
! 6068: \catcode`\<=\active
! 6069: \catcode`\>=\active
! 6070: \catcode`\\=\active
! 6071: \catcode`\^=\active
! 6072: \catcode`\_=\active
! 6073: \catcode`\|=\active
! 6074: \catcode`\~=\active
! 6075: }
! 6076:
! 6077:
! 6078: % Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input.
! 6079: \def\readtocfile{%
! 6080: \setupdatafile
! 6081: \activecatcodes
! 6082: \input \tocreadfilename
! 6083: }
! 6084:
! 6085: \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
! 6086: \newcount\savepageno
! 6087: \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
! 6088:
! 6089: % Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
! 6090: %
! 6091: \def\startcontents#1{%
! 6092: % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
! 6093: % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain
! 6094: % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
! 6095: % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
! 6096: \contentsalignmacro
! 6097: \immediate\closeout\tocfile
! 6098: %
! 6099: % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
! 6100: % It is abundantly clear what they are.
! 6101: \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
! 6102: %
! 6103: \savepageno = \pageno
! 6104: \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
! 6105: \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
! 6106: \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
! 6107: %
! 6108: % Roman numerals for page numbers.
! 6109: \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
! 6110: }
! 6111:
! 6112: % redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on
! 6113: % \jobname.toc even if this is redefined.
! 6114: %
! 6115: \def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc}
! 6116:
! 6117: % Normal (long) toc.
! 6118: %
! 6119: \def\contents{%
! 6120: \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
! 6121: \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
! 6122: \ifeof 1 \else
! 6123: \readtocfile
! 6124: \fi
! 6125: \vfill \eject
! 6126: \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
! 6127: \ifeof 1 \else
! 6128: \pdfmakeoutlines
! 6129: \fi
! 6130: \closein 1
! 6131: \endgroup
! 6132: \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
! 6133: \global\pageno = \savepageno
! 6134: }
! 6135:
! 6136: % And just the chapters.
! 6137: \def\summarycontents{%
! 6138: \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
! 6139: %
! 6140: \let\partentry = \shortpartentry
! 6141: \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
! 6142: \let\appentry = \shortchapentry
! 6143: \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
! 6144: % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
! 6145: \secfonts
! 6146: \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
! 6147: \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
! 6148: \rm
! 6149: \hyphenpenalty = 10000
! 6150: \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
! 6151: \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
! 6152: \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
! 6153: \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
! 6154: \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
! 6155: \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
! 6156: \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
! 6157: \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
! 6158: \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
! 6159: \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
! 6160: \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
! 6161: \ifeof 1 \else
! 6162: \readtocfile
! 6163: \fi
! 6164: \closein 1
! 6165: \vfill \eject
! 6166: \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
! 6167: \endgroup
! 6168: \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
! 6169: \global\pageno = \savepageno
! 6170: }
! 6171: \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
! 6172:
! 6173: % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
! 6174: % The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
! 6175: %
! 6176: \def\shortchaplabel#1{%
! 6177: % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
! 6178: % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
! 6179: % But use \hss just in case.
! 6180: % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
! 6181: % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
! 6182: %
! 6183: % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
! 6184: % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and
! 6185: % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
! 6186: % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
! 6187: % there are before deciding ...
! 6188: \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
! 6189: }
! 6190:
! 6191: % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
! 6192: % The first argument is the chapter or section name.
! 6193: % The last argument is the page number.
! 6194: % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
! 6195:
! 6196: % Parts, in the main contents. Replace the part number, which doesn't
! 6197: % exist, with an empty box. Let's hope all the numbers have the same width.
! 6198: % Also ignore the page number, which is conventionally not printed.
! 6199: \def\numeralbox{\setbox0=\hbox{8}\hbox to \wd0{\hfil}}
! 6200: \def\partentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\numeralbox\labelspace#1}{}}
! 6201: %
! 6202: % Parts, in the short toc.
! 6203: \def\shortpartentry#1#2#3#4{%
! 6204: \penalty-300
! 6205: \vskip.5\baselineskip plus.15\baselineskip minus.1\baselineskip
! 6206: \shortchapentry{{\bf #1}}{\numeralbox}{}{}%
! 6207: }
! 6208:
! 6209: % Chapters, in the main contents.
! 6210: \def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
! 6211: %
! 6212: % Chapters, in the short toc.
! 6213: % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
! 6214: \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
! 6215: \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
! 6216: }
! 6217:
! 6218: % Appendices, in the main contents.
! 6219: % Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
! 6220: %
! 6221: \def\appendixbox#1{%
! 6222: % We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
! 6223: \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
! 6224: \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
! 6225: %
! 6226: \def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}}
! 6227:
! 6228: % Unnumbered chapters.
! 6229: \def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
! 6230: \def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
! 6231:
! 6232: % Sections.
! 6233: \def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
! 6234: \let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
! 6235: \def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
! 6236:
! 6237: % Subsections.
! 6238: \def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
! 6239: \let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
! 6240: \def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
! 6241:
! 6242: % And subsubsections.
! 6243: \def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
! 6244: \let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
! 6245: \def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
! 6246:
! 6247: % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
! 6248: % Same as \defaultparindent.
! 6249: \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
! 6250:
! 6251: % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
! 6252: % page number.
! 6253: %
! 6254: % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
! 6255: % if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
! 6256: \def\dochapentry#1#2{%
! 6257: \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
! 6258: \begingroup
! 6259: \chapentryfonts
! 6260: \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
! 6261: \endgroup
! 6262: \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
! 6263: }
! 6264:
! 6265: \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
! 6266: \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
! 6267: \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
! 6268: \endgroup}
! 6269:
! 6270: \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
! 6271: \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
! 6272: \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
! 6273: \endgroup}
! 6274:
! 6275: \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
! 6276: \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
! 6277: \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
! 6278: \endgroup}
! 6279:
! 6280: % We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
! 6281: \let\tocentry = \entry
! 6282:
! 6283: % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
! 6284: \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
! 6285:
! 6286: \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
! 6287: \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
! 6288:
! 6289: \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
! 6290: \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
! 6291: \def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
! 6292: \def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
! 6293:
! 6294:
! 6295: \message{environments,}
! 6296: % @foo ... @end foo.
! 6297:
! 6298: % @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw TeX temporarily.
! 6299: % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
! 6300: % But \@ or @@ will get a plain @ character.
! 6301:
! 6302: \envdef\tex{%
! 6303: \setupmarkupstyle{tex}%
! 6304: \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
! 6305: \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
! 6306: \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
! 6307: \catcode `\%=14
! 6308: \catcode `\+=\other
! 6309: \catcode `\"=\other
! 6310: \catcode `\|=\other
! 6311: \catcode `\<=\other
! 6312: \catcode `\>=\other
! 6313: \catcode `\`=\other
! 6314: \catcode `\'=\other
! 6315: \escapechar=`\\
! 6316: %
! 6317: % ' is active in math mode (mathcode"8000). So reset it, and all our
! 6318: % other math active characters (just in case), to plain's definitions.
! 6319: \mathactive
! 6320: %
! 6321: \let\b=\ptexb
! 6322: \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
! 6323: \let\c=\ptexc
! 6324: \let\,=\ptexcomma
! 6325: \let\.=\ptexdot
! 6326: \let\dots=\ptexdots
! 6327: \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
! 6328: \let\!=\ptexexclam
! 6329: \let\i=\ptexi
! 6330: \let\indent=\ptexindent
! 6331: \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
! 6332: \let\{=\ptexlbrace
! 6333: \let\+=\tabalign
! 6334: \let\}=\ptexrbrace
! 6335: \let\/=\ptexslash
! 6336: \let\*=\ptexstar
! 6337: \let\t=\ptext
! 6338: \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % we've made it outer
! 6339: \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing
! 6340: %
! 6341: \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
! 6342: \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
! 6343: \def\@{@}%
! 6344: }
! 6345: % There is no need to define \Etex.
! 6346:
! 6347: % Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
! 6348: % @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
! 6349: % including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
! 6350:
! 6351: % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
! 6352: \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
! 6353:
! 6354: % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
! 6355: % such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
! 6356: % have any width.
! 6357: \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
! 6358:
! 6359: % This space is always present above and below environments.
! 6360: \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
! 6361:
! 6362: % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here
! 6363: % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
! 6364: % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
! 6365: % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
! 6366: %
! 6367: \def\aboveenvbreak{{%
! 6368: % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
! 6369: % \sectionheading, q.v.
! 6370: \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
! 6371: \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
! 6372: \endgraf
! 6373: \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
! 6374: \removelastskip
! 6375: % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
! 6376: % or better ...
! 6377: \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
! 6378: \vskip\envskipamount
! 6379: \fi
! 6380: \fi
! 6381: }}
! 6382:
! 6383: \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
! 6384:
! 6385: % \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will
! 6386: % also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again.
! 6387: \let\nonarrowing=\relax
! 6388:
! 6389: % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
! 6390: % environment contents.
! 6391: \font\circle=lcircle10
! 6392: \newdimen\circthick
! 6393: \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
! 6394: \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
! 6395: \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
! 6396: %
! 6397: \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
! 6398: \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
! 6399: \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
! 6400: \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
! 6401: \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
! 6402: \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
! 6403: \hskip\rskip}}
! 6404: \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
! 6405: \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
! 6406: \hskip\rskip}}
! 6407: %
! 6408: \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
! 6409:
! 6410: \envdef\cartouche{%
! 6411: \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
! 6412: \startsavinginserts
! 6413: \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
! 6414: \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
! 6415: \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
! 6416: \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
! 6417: \cartouter=\hsize
! 6418: \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
! 6419: % side, and for 6pt waste from
! 6420: % each corner char, and rule thickness
! 6421: \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
! 6422: % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
! 6423: \let\nonarrowing = t%
! 6424: %
! 6425: % If this cartouche directly follows a sectioning command, we need the
! 6426: % \parskip glue (backspaced over by default) or the cartouche can
! 6427: % collide with the section heading.
! 6428: \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \penalty\lastpenalty \fi
! 6429: %
! 6430: \vbox\bgroup
! 6431: \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
! 6432: \carttop
! 6433: \hbox\bgroup
! 6434: \hskip\lskip
! 6435: \vrule\kern3pt
! 6436: \vbox\bgroup
! 6437: \kern3pt
! 6438: \hsize=\cartinner
! 6439: \baselineskip=\normbskip
! 6440: \lineskip=\normlskip
! 6441: \parskip=\normpskip
! 6442: \vskip -\parskip
! 6443: \comment % For explanation, see the end of def\group.
! 6444: }
! 6445: \def\Ecartouche{%
! 6446: \ifhmode\par\fi
! 6447: \kern3pt
! 6448: \egroup
! 6449: \kern3pt\vrule
! 6450: \hskip\rskip
! 6451: \egroup
! 6452: \cartbot
! 6453: \egroup
! 6454: \checkinserts
! 6455: }
! 6456:
! 6457:
! 6458: % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
! 6459: % inside a group.
! 6460: \newdimen\nonfillparindent
! 6461: \def\nonfillstart{%
! 6462: \aboveenvbreak
! 6463: \ifdim\hfuzz < 12pt \hfuzz = 12pt \fi % Don't be fussy
! 6464: \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
! 6465: \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
! 6466: \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
! 6467: \parskip = 0pt
! 6468: % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate
! 6469: % the normal \indent.
! 6470: \nonfillparindent=\parindent
! 6471: \parindent = 0pt
! 6472: \let\indent\nonfillindent
! 6473: %
! 6474: \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
! 6475: \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
! 6476: \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
! 6477: \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
! 6478: \else
! 6479: \let\nonarrowing = \relax
! 6480: \fi
! 6481: \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
! 6482: }
! 6483:
! 6484: \begingroup
! 6485: \obeyspaces
! 6486: % We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake
! 6487: % @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally
! 6488: % active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after
! 6489: % @indent.
! 6490: \gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}%
! 6491: \gdef\nonfillindentcheck{%
! 6492: \ifx\temp %
! 6493: \expandafter\nonfillindentgobble%
! 6494: \else%
! 6495: \leavevmode\nonfillindentbox%
! 6496: \fi%
! 6497: }%
! 6498: \endgroup
! 6499: \def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent}
! 6500: \def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}}
! 6501:
! 6502: % If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
! 6503: % If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
! 6504: % This affects the following displayed environments:
! 6505: % @example, @display, @format, @lisp
! 6506: %
! 6507: \def\smallword{small}
! 6508: \def\nosmallword{nosmall}
! 6509: \let\SETdispenvsize\relax
! 6510: \def\setnormaldispenv{%
! 6511: \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
! 6512: % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank
! 6513: % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but
! 6514: % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient
! 6515: % to change the fonts afterward.
! 6516: \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
! 6517: \smallexamplefonts \rm
! 6518: \fi
! 6519: }
! 6520: \def\setsmalldispenv{%
! 6521: \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
! 6522: \else
! 6523: \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
! 6524: \smallexamplefonts \rm
! 6525: \fi
! 6526: }
! 6527:
! 6528: % We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
! 6529: % Let's do it in one command. #1 is the env name, #2 the definition.
! 6530: \def\makedispenvdef#1#2{%
! 6531: \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}%
! 6532: \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}%
! 6533: \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
! 6534: \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
! 6535: }
! 6536:
! 6537: % Define two environment synonyms (#1 and #2) for an environment.
! 6538: \def\maketwodispenvdef#1#2#3{%
! 6539: \makedispenvdef{#1}{#3}%
! 6540: \makedispenvdef{#2}{#3}%
! 6541: }
! 6542: %
! 6543: % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font;
! 6544: % @example: same as @lisp.
! 6545: %
! 6546: % @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
! 6547: % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
! 6548: %
! 6549: \maketwodispenvdef{lisp}{example}{%
! 6550: \nonfillstart
! 6551: \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}%
! 6552: \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
! 6553: \gobble % eat return
! 6554: }
! 6555: % @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
! 6556: %
! 6557: \makedispenvdef{display}{%
! 6558: \nonfillstart
! 6559: \gobble
! 6560: }
! 6561:
! 6562: % @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
! 6563: %
! 6564: \makedispenvdef{format}{%
! 6565: \let\nonarrowing = t%
! 6566: \nonfillstart
! 6567: \gobble
! 6568: }
! 6569:
! 6570: % @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
! 6571: \envdef\flushleft{%
! 6572: \let\nonarrowing = t%
! 6573: \nonfillstart
! 6574: \gobble
! 6575: }
! 6576: \let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
! 6577:
! 6578: % @flushright.
! 6579: %
! 6580: \envdef\flushright{%
! 6581: \let\nonarrowing = t%
! 6582: \nonfillstart
! 6583: \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill\relax
! 6584: \gobble
! 6585: }
! 6586: \let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
! 6587:
! 6588:
! 6589: % @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right
! 6590: % justification. From plain.tex.
! 6591: \envdef\raggedright{%
! 6592: \rightskip0pt plus2em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax
! 6593: }
! 6594: \let\Eraggedright\par
! 6595:
! 6596: \envdef\raggedleft{%
! 6597: \parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em
! 6598: \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt
! 6599: \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
! 6600: % badness reporting.
! 6601: }
! 6602: \let\Eraggedleft\par
! 6603:
! 6604: \envdef\raggedcenter{%
! 6605: \parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em
! 6606: \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt
! 6607: \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
! 6608: % badness reporting.
! 6609: }
! 6610: \let\Eraggedcenter\par
! 6611:
! 6612:
! 6613: % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
! 6614: % and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
! 6615: % we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
! 6616: % \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
! 6617: %
! 6618: \makedispenvdef{quotation}{\quotationstart}
! 6619: %
! 6620: \def\quotationstart{%
! 6621: \indentedblockstart % same as \indentedblock, but increase right margin too.
! 6622: \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
! 6623: \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
! 6624: \fi
! 6625: \parsearg\quotationlabel
! 6626: }
! 6627:
! 6628: % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
! 6629: % doing normal filling.
! 6630: %
! 6631: \def\Equotation{%
! 6632: \par
! 6633: \ifx\quotationauthor\thisisundefined\else
! 6634: % indent a bit.
! 6635: \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
! 6636: \fi
! 6637: {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
! 6638: }
! 6639: \def\Esmallquotation{\Equotation}
! 6640:
! 6641: % If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
! 6642: \def\quotationlabel#1{%
! 6643: \def\temp{#1}%
! 6644: \ifx\temp\empty \else
! 6645: {\bf #1: }%
! 6646: \fi
! 6647: }
! 6648:
! 6649: % @indentedblock is like @quotation, but indents only on the left and
! 6650: % has no optional argument.
! 6651: %
! 6652: \makedispenvdef{indentedblock}{\indentedblockstart}
! 6653: %
! 6654: \def\indentedblockstart{%
! 6655: {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
! 6656: \parindent=0pt
! 6657: %
! 6658: % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
! 6659: \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
! 6660: \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
! 6661: \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
! 6662: \else
! 6663: \let\nonarrowing = \relax
! 6664: \fi
! 6665: }
! 6666:
! 6667: % Keep a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're doing normal filling.
! 6668: %
! 6669: \def\Eindentedblock{%
! 6670: \par
! 6671: {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
! 6672: }
! 6673: \def\Esmallindentedblock{\Eindentedblock}
! 6674:
! 6675:
! 6676: % LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
! 6677: % If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
! 6678: % we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
! 6679: % `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org
! 6680: %
! 6681: % [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook.
! 6682: %
! 6683: % [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
! 6684: % active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
! 6685: % verbatim line.
! 6686: \def\dospecials{%
! 6687: \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
! 6688: \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
! 6689: \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
! 6690: % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and
! 6691: % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and
! 6692: % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled.
! 6693: %\do\`\do\'%
! 6694: }
! 6695: %
! 6696: % [Knuth] p. 380
! 6697: \def\uncatcodespecials{%
! 6698: \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
! 6699: %
! 6700: % Setup for the @verb command.
! 6701: %
! 6702: % Eight spaces for a tab
! 6703: \begingroup
! 6704: \catcode`\^^I=\active
! 6705: \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
! 6706: \endgroup
! 6707: %
! 6708: \def\setupverb{%
! 6709: \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
! 6710: \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
! 6711: \setupmarkupstyle{verb}%
! 6712: \tabeightspaces
! 6713: % Respect line breaks,
! 6714: % print special symbols as themselves, and
! 6715: % make each space count
! 6716: % must do in this order:
! 6717: \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
! 6718: }
! 6719:
! 6720: % Setup for the @verbatim environment
! 6721: %
! 6722: % Real tab expansion.
! 6723: \newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
! 6724: %
! 6725: % We typeset each line of the verbatim in an \hbox, so we can handle
! 6726: % tabs. The \global is in case the verbatim line starts with an accent,
! 6727: % or some other command that starts with a begin-group. Otherwise, the
! 6728: % entire \verbbox would disappear at the corresponding end-group, before
! 6729: % it is typeset. Meanwhile, we can't have nested verbatim commands
! 6730: % (can we?), so the \global won't be overwriting itself.
! 6731: \newbox\verbbox
! 6732: \def\starttabbox{\global\setbox\verbbox=\hbox\bgroup}
! 6733: %
! 6734: \begingroup
! 6735: \catcode`\^^I=\active
! 6736: \gdef\tabexpand{%
! 6737: \catcode`\^^I=\active
! 6738: \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
! 6739: \dimen\verbbox=\wd\verbbox % the width so far, or since the previous tab
! 6740: \divide\dimen\verbbox by\tabw
! 6741: \multiply\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
! 6742: \advance\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw
! 6743: \wd\verbbox=\dimen\verbbox \box\verbbox \starttabbox
! 6744: }%
! 6745: }
! 6746: \endgroup
! 6747:
! 6748: % start the verbatim environment.
! 6749: \def\setupverbatim{%
! 6750: \let\nonarrowing = t%
! 6751: \nonfillstart
! 6752: \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
! 6753: % The \leavevmode here is for blank lines. Otherwise, we would
! 6754: % never \starttabox and the \egroup would end verbatim mode.
! 6755: \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box\verbbox\endgraf}%
! 6756: \tabexpand
! 6757: \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}%
! 6758: % Respect line breaks,
! 6759: % print special symbols as themselves, and
! 6760: % make each space count.
! 6761: % Must do in this order:
! 6762: \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
! 6763: \everypar{\starttabbox}%
! 6764: }
! 6765:
! 6766: % Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
! 6767: % delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a
! 6768: % right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
! 6769: %
! 6770: % \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
! 6771: %
! 6772: % [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
! 6773: \begingroup
! 6774: \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
! 6775: \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
! 6776: \endgroup
! 6777: %
! 6778: \def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
! 6779: %
! 6780: %
! 6781: % Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
! 6782: % the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
! 6783: %
! 6784: % \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
! 6785: %
! 6786: % For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
! 6787: % because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
! 6788: % we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
! 6789: %
! 6790: % Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
! 6791: %
! 6792: \begingroup
! 6793: \catcode`\ =\active
! 6794: \obeylines %
! 6795: % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
! 6796: % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank
! 6797: % line in the output.
! 6798: \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
! 6799: % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
! 6800: % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
! 6801: \endgroup
! 6802: %
! 6803: \envdef\verbatim{%
! 6804: \setupverbatim\doverbatim
! 6805: }
! 6806: \let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
! 6807:
! 6808:
! 6809: % @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
! 6810: %
! 6811: \def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
! 6812: %
! 6813: \def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
! 6814: {%
! 6815: \makevalueexpandable
! 6816: \setupverbatim
! 6817: \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
! 6818: \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @verbatiminclude of #1^^J}%
! 6819: \input #1
! 6820: \afterenvbreak
! 6821: }%
! 6822: }
! 6823:
! 6824: % @copying ... @end copying.
! 6825: % Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
! 6826: %
! 6827: % We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
! 6828: % Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
! 6829: % typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
! 6830: % beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
! 6831: % file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
! 6832: % possible is very desirable.
! 6833: %
! 6834: \def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
! 6835: \def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
! 6836: %
! 6837: \def\insertcopying{%
! 6838: \begingroup
! 6839: \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
! 6840: \scanexp\copyingtext
! 6841: \endgroup
! 6842: }
! 6843:
! 6844:
! 6845: \message{defuns,}
! 6846: % @defun etc.
! 6847:
! 6848: \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
! 6849: \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
! 6850: \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
! 6851: \newcount\defunpenalty
! 6852:
! 6853: % Start the processing of @deffn:
! 6854: \def\startdefun{%
! 6855: \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
! 6856: \medbreak
! 6857: \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the
! 6858: % following @def command, see below.
! 6859: \else
! 6860: % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
! 6861: % which is there to keep the function description together with its
! 6862: % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
! 6863: % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
! 6864: % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
! 6865: % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
! 6866: % a break between a section heading and a defun.
! 6867: %
! 6868: % As a further refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling
! 6869: % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the
! 6870: % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following
! 6871: % @def command.
! 6872: \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
! 6873: %
! 6874: % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
! 6875: % But do insert the glue.
! 6876: \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
! 6877: \fi
! 6878: %
! 6879: \parindent=0in
! 6880: \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
! 6881: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
! 6882: }
! 6883:
! 6884: \def\dodefunx#1{%
! 6885: % First, check whether we are in the right environment:
! 6886: \checkenv#1%
! 6887: %
! 6888: % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
! 6889: % It's not a great place, though.
! 6890: \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
! 6891: %
! 6892: % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
! 6893: \expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
! 6894: }
! 6895: \def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
! 6896:
! 6897: % \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
! 6898: %
! 6899: \def\printdefunline#1#2{%
! 6900: \begingroup
! 6901: % call \deffnheader:
! 6902: #1#2 \endheader
! 6903: % common ending:
! 6904: \interlinepenalty = 10000
! 6905: \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil\relax
! 6906: \endgraf
! 6907: \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
! 6908: \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
! 6909: % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
! 6910: % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize.
! 6911: \checkparencounts
! 6912: \endgroup
! 6913: }
! 6914:
! 6915: \def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
! 6916:
! 6917: % \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
! 6918: % the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader.
! 6919: %
! 6920: \def\makedefun#1{%
! 6921: \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
! 6922: \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
! 6923: \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
! 6924: \temp
! 6925: }
! 6926:
! 6927: % \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader
! 6928: %
! 6929: % Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
! 6930: % \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
! 6931: %
! 6932: \def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
! 6933: \envdef#1{%
! 6934: \startdefun
! 6935: \doingtypefnfalse % distinguish typed functions from all else
! 6936: \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
! 6937: }%
! 6938: \def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
! 6939: \def#3%
! 6940: }
! 6941:
! 6942: \newif\ifdoingtypefn % doing typed function?
! 6943: \newif\ifrettypeownline % typeset return type on its own line?
! 6944:
! 6945: % @deftypefnnewline on|off says whether the return type of typed functions
! 6946: % are printed on their own line. This affects @deftypefn, @deftypefun,
! 6947: % @deftypeop, and @deftypemethod.
! 6948: %
! 6949: \parseargdef\deftypefnnewline{%
! 6950: \def\temp{#1}%
! 6951: \ifx\temp\onword
! 6952: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname
! 6953: = \empty
! 6954: \else\ifx\temp\offword
! 6955: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname
! 6956: = \relax
! 6957: \else
! 6958: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 6959: \errmessage{Unknown @txideftypefnnl value `\temp',
! 6960: must be on|off}%
! 6961: \fi\fi
! 6962: }
! 6963:
! 6964: % Untyped functions:
! 6965:
! 6966: % @deffn category name args
! 6967: \makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
! 6968:
! 6969: % @deffn category class name args
! 6970: \makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
! 6971:
! 6972: % \defopon {category on}class name args
! 6973: \def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
! 6974:
! 6975: % \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
! 6976: %
! 6977: \def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
! 6978: % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}.
! 6979: \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
! 6980: \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
! 6981: }
! 6982:
! 6983: % Typed functions:
! 6984:
! 6985: % @deftypefn category type name args
! 6986: \makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
! 6987:
! 6988: % @deftypeop category class type name args
! 6989: \makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
! 6990:
! 6991: % \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
! 6992: \def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
! 6993:
! 6994: % \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
! 6995: %
! 6996: \def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
! 6997: \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
! 6998: \doingtypefntrue
! 6999: \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
! 7000: }
! 7001:
! 7002: % Typed variables:
! 7003:
! 7004: % @deftypevr category type var args
! 7005: \makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
! 7006:
! 7007: % @deftypecv category class type var args
! 7008: \makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
! 7009:
! 7010: % \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
! 7011: \def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
! 7012:
! 7013: % \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
! 7014: %
! 7015: \def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
! 7016: \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
! 7017: \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
! 7018: }
! 7019:
! 7020: % Untyped variables:
! 7021:
! 7022: % @defvr category var args
! 7023: \makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
! 7024:
! 7025: % @defcv category class var args
! 7026: \makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
! 7027:
! 7028: % \defcvof {category of}class var args
! 7029: \def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
! 7030:
! 7031: % Types:
! 7032:
! 7033: % @deftp category name args
! 7034: \makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
! 7035: \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
! 7036: \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
! 7037: }
! 7038:
! 7039: % Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
! 7040: \makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
! 7041: \makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
! 7042: \makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
! 7043: \makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
! 7044: \makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
! 7045: \makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
! 7046: \makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
! 7047: \makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
! 7048: \makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
! 7049: \makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
! 7050: \makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
! 7051:
! 7052: % \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
! 7053: % #1 is the category, such as "Function".
! 7054: % #2 is the return type, if any.
! 7055: % #3 is the function name.
! 7056: %
! 7057: % We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
! 7058: %
! 7059: \def\defname#1#2#3{%
! 7060: \par
! 7061: % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
! 7062: \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
! 7063: %
! 7064: % Determine if we are typesetting the return type of a typed function
! 7065: % on a line by itself.
! 7066: \rettypeownlinefalse
! 7067: \ifdoingtypefn % doing a typed function specifically?
! 7068: % then check user option for putting return type on its own line:
! 7069: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname\relax \else
! 7070: \rettypeownlinetrue
! 7071: \fi
! 7072: \fi
! 7073: %
! 7074: % How we'll format the category name. Putting it in brackets helps
! 7075: % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
! 7076: % just below it.
! 7077: \def\temp{#1}%
! 7078: \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
! 7079: %
! 7080: % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. We'll always have at
! 7081: % least two.
! 7082: \tempnum = 2
! 7083: %
! 7084: % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
! 7085: % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
! 7086: \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
! 7087: %
! 7088: % If doing a return type on its own line, we'll have another line.
! 7089: \ifrettypeownline
! 7090: \advance\tempnum by 1
! 7091: \def\maybeshapeline{0in \hsize}%
! 7092: \else
! 7093: \def\maybeshapeline{}%
! 7094: \fi
! 7095: %
! 7096: % The continuations:
! 7097: \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
! 7098: %
! 7099: % The final paragraph shape:
! 7100: \parshape \tempnum 0in \dimen0 \maybeshapeline \defargsindent \dimen2
! 7101: %
! 7102: % Put the category name at the right margin.
! 7103: \noindent
! 7104: \hbox to 0pt{%
! 7105: \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
! 7106: % \hsize has to be shortened this way:
! 7107: \kern\leftskip
! 7108: % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
! 7109: }%
! 7110: %
! 7111: % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
! 7112: \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
! 7113: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
! 7114: {%
! 7115: % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
! 7116: % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
! 7117: % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
! 7118: % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in
! 7119: % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
! 7120: % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
! 7121: % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
! 7122: % one has made identifiers using them :).
! 7123: \df \tt
! 7124: \def\temp{#2}% text of the return type
! 7125: \ifx\temp\empty\else
! 7126: \tclose{\temp}% typeset the return type
! 7127: \ifrettypeownline
! 7128: % put return type on its own line; prohibit line break following:
! 7129: \hfil\vadjust{\nobreak}\break
! 7130: \else
! 7131: \space % type on same line, so just followed by a space
! 7132: \fi
! 7133: \fi % no return type
! 7134: #3% output function name
! 7135: }%
! 7136: {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm
! 7137: %
! 7138: \boldbrax
! 7139: % arguments will be output next, if any.
! 7140: }
! 7141:
! 7142: % Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
! 7143: % tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
! 7144: % the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
! 7145: % distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
! 7146: %
! 7147: \def\defunargs#1{%
! 7148: % use sl by default (not ttsl),
! 7149: % tt for the names.
! 7150: \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
! 7151: %
! 7152: % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
! 7153: % want a way to get ttsl. We used to recommend @var for that, so
! 7154: % leave the code in, but it's strange for @var to lead to typewriter.
! 7155: % Nowadays we recommend @code, since the difference between a ttsl hyphen
! 7156: % and a tt hyphen is pretty tiny. @code also disables ?` !`.
! 7157: \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}%
! 7158: #1%
! 7159: \sl\hyphenchar\font=45
! 7160: }
! 7161:
! 7162: % We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
! 7163: %
! 7164: \def\activeparens{%
! 7165: \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
! 7166: \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
! 7167: \catcode`\&=\active
! 7168: }
! 7169:
! 7170: % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
! 7171: \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
! 7172:
! 7173: % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
! 7174: % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
! 7175: % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
! 7176: {
! 7177: \activeparens
! 7178: \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
! 7179: \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
! 7180: \global\let& = \&
! 7181:
! 7182: \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
! 7183: \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
! 7184: }
! 7185:
! 7186: \newcount\parencount
! 7187:
! 7188: % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
! 7189: \newif\ifampseen
! 7190: \def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }}
! 7191:
! 7192: \def\parenfont{%
! 7193: \ifampseen
! 7194: % At the first level, print parens in roman,
! 7195: % otherwise use the default font.
! 7196: \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
! 7197: \else
! 7198: % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
! 7199: % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] .
! 7200: \sf
! 7201: \fi
! 7202: }
! 7203: \def\infirstlevel#1{%
! 7204: \ifampseen
! 7205: \ifnum\parencount=1
! 7206: #1%
! 7207: \fi
! 7208: \fi
! 7209: }
! 7210: \def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
! 7211:
! 7212: \def\opnr{%
! 7213: \global\advance\parencount by 1
! 7214: {\parenfont(}%
! 7215: \infirstlevel \bfafterword
! 7216: }
! 7217: \def\clnr{%
! 7218: {\parenfont)}%
! 7219: \infirstlevel \sl
! 7220: \global\advance\parencount by -1
! 7221: }
! 7222:
! 7223: \newcount\brackcount
! 7224: \def\lbrb{%
! 7225: \global\advance\brackcount by 1
! 7226: {\bf[}%
! 7227: }
! 7228: \def\rbrb{%
! 7229: {\bf]}%
! 7230: \global\advance\brackcount by -1
! 7231: }
! 7232:
! 7233: \def\checkparencounts{%
! 7234: \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
! 7235: \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
! 7236: }
! 7237: % these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually
! 7238: % has such constructs (when documenting function pointers).
! 7239: \def\badparencount{%
! 7240: \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}%
! 7241: \global\parencount=0
! 7242: }
! 7243: \def\badbrackcount{%
! 7244: \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}%
! 7245: \global\brackcount=0
! 7246: }
! 7247:
! 7248:
! 7249: \message{macros,}
! 7250: % @macro.
! 7251:
! 7252: % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
! 7253: % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
! 7254: \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined
! 7255: \newwrite\macscribble
! 7256: \def\scantokens#1{%
! 7257: \toks0={#1}%
! 7258: \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
! 7259: \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
! 7260: \immediate\closeout\macscribble
! 7261: \input \jobname.tmp
! 7262: }
! 7263: \fi
! 7264:
! 7265: \def\scanmacro#1{\begingroup
! 7266: \newlinechar`\^^M
! 7267: \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
! 7268: %
! 7269: % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
! 7270: % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active
! 7271: % backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had
! 7272: % \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears
! 7273: % with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04
! 7274: \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@
! 7275: %
! 7276: % ... and for \example:
! 7277: \spaceisspace
! 7278: %
! 7279: % The \empty here causes a following catcode 5 newline to be eaten as
! 7280: % part of reading whitespace after a control sequence. It does not
! 7281: % eat a catcode 13 newline. There's no good way to handle the two
! 7282: % cases (untried: maybe e-TeX's \everyeof could help, though plain TeX
! 7283: % would then have different behavior). See the Macro Details node in
! 7284: % the manual for the workaround we recommend for macros and
! 7285: % line-oriented commands.
! 7286: %
! 7287: \scantokens{#1\empty}%
! 7288: \endgroup}
! 7289:
! 7290: \def\scanexp#1{%
! 7291: \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}%
! 7292: \temp
! 7293: }
! 7294:
! 7295: \newcount\paramno % Count of parameters
! 7296: \newtoks\macname % Macro name
! 7297: \newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive?
! 7298:
! 7299: % List of all defined macros in the form
! 7300: % \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2...
! 7301: % Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split
! 7302: % if there is a need.
! 7303: \def\macrolist{}
! 7304:
! 7305: % Add the macro to \macrolist
! 7306: \def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname}
! 7307: \def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{%
! 7308: \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}%
! 7309: \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}%
! 7310: }
! 7311:
! 7312: % Utility routines.
! 7313: % This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
! 7314: % \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
! 7315: % (except of course we have to play expansion games).
! 7316: %
! 7317: \def\cslet#1#2{%
! 7318: \expandafter\let
! 7319: \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
! 7320: \csname#2\endcsname
! 7321: }
! 7322:
! 7323: % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
! 7324: % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
! 7325: {\catcode`\@=11
! 7326: \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
! 7327: \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
! 7328: \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
! 7329: \def\unbrace#1{#1}
! 7330: \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
! 7331: }
! 7332:
! 7333: % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
! 7334: {\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
! 7335: \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
! 7336: \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
! 7337: \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
! 7338: }
! 7339:
! 7340: % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
! 7341: % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
! 7342: % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \
! 7343: % to recognize macro arguments; this is the job of \mbodybackslash.
! 7344: %
! 7345: % Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate
! 7346: % them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to
! 7347: % confine the change to the current group.
! 7348: %
! 7349: % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
! 7350: % done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
! 7351: % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
! 7352: %
! 7353: \def\scanctxt{% used as subroutine
! 7354: \catcode`\"=\other
! 7355: \catcode`\+=\other
! 7356: \catcode`\<=\other
! 7357: \catcode`\>=\other
! 7358: \catcode`\@=\other
! 7359: \catcode`\^=\other
! 7360: \catcode`\_=\other
! 7361: \catcode`\|=\other
! 7362: \catcode`\~=\other
! 7363: \ifx\declaredencoding\ascii \else \setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other \fi
! 7364: }
! 7365:
! 7366: \def\scanargctxt{% used for copying and captions, not macros.
! 7367: \scanctxt
! 7368: \catcode`\\=\other
! 7369: \catcode`\^^M=\other
! 7370: }
! 7371:
! 7372: \def\macrobodyctxt{% used for @macro definitions
! 7373: \scanctxt
! 7374: \catcode`\{=\other
! 7375: \catcode`\}=\other
! 7376: \catcode`\^^M=\other
! 7377: \usembodybackslash
! 7378: }
! 7379:
! 7380: \def\macroargctxt{% used when scanning invocations
! 7381: \scanctxt
! 7382: \catcode`\\=0
! 7383: }
! 7384: % why catcode 0 for \ in the above? To recognize \\ \{ \} as "escapes"
! 7385: % for the single characters \ { }. Thus, we end up with the "commands"
! 7386: % that would be written @\ @{ @} in a Texinfo document.
! 7387: %
! 7388: % We already have @{ and @}. For @\, we define it here, and only for
! 7389: % this purpose, to produce a typewriter backslash (so, the @\ that we
! 7390: % define for @math can't be used with @macro calls):
! 7391: %
! 7392: \def\\{\normalbackslash}%
! 7393: %
! 7394: % We would like to do this for \, too, since that is what makeinfo does.
! 7395: % But it is not possible, because Texinfo already has a command @, for a
! 7396: % cedilla accent. Documents must use @comma{} instead.
! 7397: %
! 7398: % \anythingelse will almost certainly be an error of some kind.
! 7399:
! 7400:
! 7401: % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
! 7402: % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
! 7403: % where N is the macro parameter number.
! 7404: % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
! 7405: % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
! 7406: %
! 7407: {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
! 7408: @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
! 7409: @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
! 7410: }
! 7411: \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
! 7412:
! 7413: \def\margbackslash#1{\char`\#1 }
! 7414:
! 7415: \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
! 7416: \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
! 7417:
! 7418: \def\macroxxx#1{%
! 7419: \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
! 7420: \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments
! 7421: \paramno=0\relax
! 7422: \else
! 7423: \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
! 7424: \if\paramno>256\relax
! 7425: \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined
! 7426: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 7427: \errmessage{You need eTeX to compile a file with macros with more than 256 arguments}
! 7428: \fi
! 7429: \fi
! 7430: \fi
! 7431: \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
! 7432: \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
! 7433: \else
! 7434: \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
! 7435: \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
! 7436: \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
! 7437: \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
! 7438: \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}%
! 7439: \fi
! 7440: \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
! 7441: \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
! 7442: \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
! 7443: \fi}
! 7444:
! 7445: \parseargdef\unmacro{%
! 7446: \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
! 7447: \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
! 7448: \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
! 7449: % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
! 7450: \begingroup
! 7451: \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
! 7452: \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo
! 7453: \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
! 7454: \endgroup
! 7455: \else
! 7456: \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
! 7457: \fi
! 7458: }
! 7459:
! 7460: % Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any
! 7461: % macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
! 7462: %
! 7463: \def\unmacrodo#1{%
! 7464: \ifx #1\relax
! 7465: % remove this
! 7466: \else
! 7467: \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1%
! 7468: \fi
! 7469: }
! 7470:
! 7471: % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
! 7472: % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
! 7473: % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
! 7474: \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
! 7475: \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
! 7476: \def\getmacname#1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
! 7477: \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
! 7478:
! 7479: % For macro processing make @ a letter so that we can make Texinfo private macro names.
! 7480: \edef\texiatcatcode{\the\catcode`\@}
! 7481: \catcode `@=11\relax
! 7482:
! 7483: % Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist
! 7484: % so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.BLAH for each BLAH
! 7485: % in the params list to some hook where the argument si to be expanded. If
! 7486: % there are less than 10 arguments that hook is to be replaced by ##N where N
! 7487: % is the position in that list, that is to say the macro arguments are to be
! 7488: % defined `a la TeX in the macro body.
! 7489: %
! 7490: % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
! 7491: %
! 7492: % We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
! 7493: % The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something
! 7494: % unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
! 7495: % it to # just before using the token list produced.
! 7496: %
! 7497: % The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
! 7498: % the macro is used.
! 7499: %
! 7500: % If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used, where the
! 7501: % hook remains in the body, and when macro is to be expanded the body is
! 7502: % processed again to replace the arguments.
! 7503: %
! 7504: % In that case, the hook is \the\toks N-1, and we simply set \toks N-1 to the
! 7505: % argument N value and then \edef the body (nothing else will expand because of
! 7506: % the catcode regime underwhich the body was input).
! 7507: %
! 7508: % If you compile with TeX (not eTeX), and you have macros with 10 or more
! 7509: % arguments, you need that no macro has more than 256 arguments, otherwise an
! 7510: % error is produced.
! 7511: \def\parsemargdef#1;{%
! 7512: \paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
! 7513: \let\hash\relax
! 7514: \let\xeatspaces\relax
! 7515: \parsemargdefxxx#1,;,%
! 7516: % In case that there are 10 or more arguments we parse again the arguments
! 7517: % list to set new definitions for the \macarg.BLAH macros corresponding to
! 7518: % each BLAH argument. It was anyhow needed to parse already once this list
! 7519: % in order to count the arguments, and as macros with at most 9 arguments
! 7520: % are by far more frequent than macro with 10 or more arguments, defining
! 7521: % twice the \macarg.BLAH macros does not cost too much processing power.
! 7522: \ifnum\paramno<10\relax\else
! 7523: \paramno0\relax
! 7524: \parsemmanyargdef@@#1,;,% 10 or more arguments
! 7525: \fi
! 7526: }
! 7527: \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
! 7528: \if#1;\let\next=\relax
! 7529: \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
! 7530: \advance\paramno by 1
! 7531: \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
! 7532: {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
! 7533: \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
! 7534: \fi\next}
! 7535:
! 7536: \def\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,{%
! 7537: \if#1;\let\next=\relax
! 7538: \else
! 7539: \let\next=\parsemmanyargdef@@
! 7540: \edef\tempb{\eatspaces{#1}}%
! 7541: \expandafter\def\expandafter\tempa
! 7542: \expandafter{\csname macarg.\tempb\endcsname}%
! 7543: % Note that we need some extra \noexpand\noexpand, this is because we
! 7544: % don't want \the to be expanded in the \parsermacbody as it uses an
! 7545: % \xdef .
! 7546: \expandafter\edef\tempa
! 7547: {\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\the\toks\the\paramno}%
! 7548: \advance\paramno by 1\relax
! 7549: \fi\next}
! 7550:
! 7551: % These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
! 7552: % (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
! 7553: %
! 7554:
! 7555: \catcode `\@\texiatcatcode
! 7556: \long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
! 7557: {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
! 7558: \long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
! 7559: {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
! 7560: \catcode `\@=11\relax
! 7561:
! 7562: \let\endargs@\relax
! 7563: \let\nil@\relax
! 7564: \def\nilm@{\nil@}%
! 7565: \long\def\nillm@{\nil@}%
! 7566:
! 7567: % This macro is expanded during the Texinfo macro expansion, not during its
! 7568: % definition. It gets all the arguments values and assigns them to macros
! 7569: % macarg.ARGNAME
! 7570: %
! 7571: % #1 is the macro name
! 7572: % #2 is the list of argument names
! 7573: % #3 is the list of argument values
! 7574: \def\getargvals@#1#2#3{%
! 7575: \def\macargdeflist@{}%
! 7576: \def\saveparamlist@{#2}% Need to keep a copy for parameter expansion.
! 7577: \def\paramlist{#2,\nil@}%
! 7578: \def\macroname{#1}%
! 7579: \begingroup
! 7580: \macroargctxt
! 7581: \def\argvaluelist{#3,\nil@}%
! 7582: \def\@tempa{#3}%
! 7583: \ifx\@tempa\empty
! 7584: \setemptyargvalues@
! 7585: \else
! 7586: \getargvals@@
! 7587: \fi
! 7588: }
! 7589:
! 7590: %
! 7591: \def\getargvals@@{%
! 7592: \ifx\paramlist\nilm@
! 7593: % Some sanity check needed here that \argvaluelist is also empty.
! 7594: \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@
! 7595: \else
! 7596: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 7597: \errmessage{Too many arguments in macro `\macroname'!}%
! 7598: \fi
! 7599: \let\next\macargexpandinbody@
! 7600: \else
! 7601: \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@
! 7602: % No more arguments values passed to macro. Set remaining named-arg
! 7603: % macros to empty.
! 7604: \let\next\setemptyargvalues@
! 7605: \else
! 7606: % pop current arg name into \@tempb
! 7607: \def\@tempa##1{\pop@{\@tempb}{\paramlist}##1\endargs@}%
! 7608: \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\paramlist}%
! 7609: % pop current argument value into \@tempc
! 7610: \def\@tempa##1{\longpop@{\@tempc}{\argvaluelist}##1\endargs@}%
! 7611: \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\argvaluelist}%
! 7612: % Here \@tempb is the current arg name and \@tempc is the current arg value.
! 7613: % First place the new argument macro definition into \@tempd
! 7614: \expandafter\macname\expandafter{\@tempc}%
! 7615: \expandafter\let\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname\relax
! 7616: \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempe\expandafter{%
! 7617: \csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname}%
! 7618: \edef\@tempd{\long\def\@tempe{\the\macname}}%
! 7619: \push@\@tempd\macargdeflist@
! 7620: \let\next\getargvals@@
! 7621: \fi
! 7622: \fi
! 7623: \next
! 7624: }
! 7625:
! 7626: \def\push@#1#2{%
! 7627: \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def
! 7628: \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#2%
! 7629: \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
! 7630: \expandafter#1#2}%
! 7631: }
! 7632:
! 7633: % Replace arguments by their values in the macro body, and place the result
! 7634: % in macro \@tempa
! 7635: \def\macvalstoargs@{%
! 7636: % To do this we use the property that token registers that are \the'ed
! 7637: % within an \edef expand only once. So we are going to place all argument
! 7638: % values into respective token registers.
! 7639: %
! 7640: % First we save the token context, and initialize argument numbering.
! 7641: \begingroup
! 7642: \paramno0\relax
! 7643: % Then, for each argument number #N, we place the corresponding argument
! 7644: % value into a new token list register \toks#N
! 7645: \expandafter\putargsintokens@\saveparamlist@,;,%
! 7646: % Then, we expand the body so that argument are replaced by their
! 7647: % values. The trick for values not to be expanded themselves is that they
! 7648: % are within tokens and that tokens expand only once in an \edef .
! 7649: \edef\@tempc{\csname mac.\macroname .body\endcsname}%
! 7650: % Now we restore the token stack pointer to free the token list registers
! 7651: % which we have used, but we make sure that expanded body is saved after
! 7652: % group.
! 7653: \expandafter
! 7654: \endgroup
! 7655: \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempc}%
! 7656: }
! 7657:
! 7658: \def\macargexpandinbody@{%
! 7659: %% Define the named-macro outside of this group and then close this group.
! 7660: \expandafter
! 7661: \endgroup
! 7662: \macargdeflist@
! 7663: % First the replace in body the macro arguments by their values, the result
! 7664: % is in \@tempa .
! 7665: \macvalstoargs@
! 7666: % Then we point at the \norecurse or \gobble (for recursive) macro value
! 7667: % with \@tempb .
! 7668: \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempb\csname mac.\macroname .recurse\endcsname
! 7669: % Depending on whether it is recursive or not, we need some tailing
! 7670: % \egroup .
! 7671: \ifx\@tempb\gobble
! 7672: \let\@tempc\relax
! 7673: \else
! 7674: \let\@tempc\egroup
! 7675: \fi
! 7676: % And now we do the real job:
! 7677: \edef\@tempd{\noexpand\@tempb{\macroname}\noexpand\scanmacro{\@tempa}\@tempc}%
! 7678: \@tempd
! 7679: }
! 7680:
! 7681: \def\putargsintokens@#1,{%
! 7682: \if#1;\let\next\relax
! 7683: \else
! 7684: \let\next\putargsintokens@
! 7685: % First we allocate the new token list register, and give it a temporary
! 7686: % alias \@tempb .
! 7687: \toksdef\@tempb\the\paramno
! 7688: % Then we place the argument value into that token list register.
! 7689: \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname macarg.#1\endcsname
! 7690: \expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\@tempa}%
! 7691: \advance\paramno by 1\relax
! 7692: \fi
! 7693: \next
! 7694: }
! 7695:
! 7696: % Save the token stack pointer into macro #1
! 7697: \def\texisavetoksstackpoint#1{\edef#1{\the\@cclvi}}
! 7698: % Restore the token stack pointer from number in macro #1
! 7699: \def\texirestoretoksstackpoint#1{\expandafter\mathchardef\expandafter\@cclvi#1\relax}
! 7700: % newtoks that can be used non \outer .
! 7701: \def\texinonouternewtoks{\alloc@ 5\toks \toksdef \@cclvi}
! 7702:
! 7703: % Tailing missing arguments are set to empty
! 7704: \def\setemptyargvalues@{%
! 7705: \ifx\paramlist\nilm@
! 7706: \let\next\macargexpandinbody@
! 7707: \else
! 7708: \expandafter\setemptyargvaluesparser@\paramlist\endargs@
! 7709: \let\next\setemptyargvalues@
! 7710: \fi
! 7711: \next
! 7712: }
! 7713:
! 7714: \def\setemptyargvaluesparser@#1,#2\endargs@{%
! 7715: \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{%
! 7716: \expandafter\def\csname macarg.#1\endcsname{}}%
! 7717: \push@\@tempa\macargdeflist@
! 7718: \def\paramlist{#2}%
! 7719: }
! 7720:
! 7721: % #1 is the element target macro
! 7722: % #2 is the list macro
! 7723: % #3,#4\endargs@ is the list value
! 7724: \def\pop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{%
! 7725: \def#1{#3}%
! 7726: \def#2{#4}%
! 7727: }
! 7728: \long\def\longpop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{%
! 7729: \long\def#1{#3}%
! 7730: \long\def#2{#4}%
! 7731: }
! 7732:
! 7733: % This defines a Texinfo @macro. There are eight cases: recursive and
! 7734: % nonrecursive macros of zero, one, up to nine, and many arguments.
! 7735: % Much magic with \expandafter here.
! 7736: % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
! 7737: % they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
! 7738: %
! 7739: \def\defmacro{%
! 7740: \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
! 7741: \ifrecursive
! 7742: \ifcase\paramno
! 7743: % 0
! 7744: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
! 7745: \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
! 7746: \or % 1
! 7747: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
! 7748: \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
! 7749: \noexpand\braceorline
! 7750: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
! 7751: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
! 7752: \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
! 7753: \else
! 7754: \ifnum\paramno<10\relax % at most 9
! 7755: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
! 7756: \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
! 7757: \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
! 7758: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
! 7759: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
! 7760: \expandafter\expandafter
! 7761: \expandafter\xdef
! 7762: \expandafter\expandafter
! 7763: \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
! 7764: \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
! 7765: \else % 10 or more
! 7766: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
! 7767: \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}%
! 7768: }%
! 7769: \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\temp
! 7770: \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\gobble
! 7771: \fi
! 7772: \fi
! 7773: \else
! 7774: \ifcase\paramno
! 7775: % 0
! 7776: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
! 7777: \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
! 7778: \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
! 7779: \or % 1
! 7780: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
! 7781: \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
! 7782: \noexpand\braceorline
! 7783: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
! 7784: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
! 7785: \egroup
! 7786: \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
! 7787: \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
! 7788: \else % at most 9
! 7789: \ifnum\paramno<10\relax
! 7790: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
! 7791: \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
! 7792: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
! 7793: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
! 7794: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
! 7795: \expandafter\expandafter
! 7796: \expandafter\xdef
! 7797: \expandafter\expandafter
! 7798: \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
! 7799: \paramlist{%
! 7800: \egroup
! 7801: \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
! 7802: \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
! 7803: \else % 10 or more:
! 7804: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
! 7805: \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}%
! 7806: }%
! 7807: \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\temp
! 7808: \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\norecurse
! 7809: \fi
! 7810: \fi
! 7811: \fi}
! 7812:
! 7813: \catcode `\@\texiatcatcode\relax
! 7814:
! 7815: \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
! 7816:
! 7817: % \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
! 7818: % {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
! 7819: % line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
! 7820: % as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg).
! 7821: %
! 7822: \def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
! 7823: \def\braceorlinexxx{%
! 7824: \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
! 7825: \expandafter\parsearg
! 7826: \fi \macnamexxx}
! 7827:
! 7828:
! 7829: % @alias.
! 7830: % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
! 7831: % sign. Make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
! 7832: %
! 7833: \def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
! 7834: \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
! 7835: \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
! 7836: {%
! 7837: \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
! 7838: \addtomacrolist{#1}%
! 7839: \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
! 7840: }%
! 7841: \next
! 7842: }
! 7843:
! 7844:
! 7845: \message{cross references,}
! 7846:
! 7847: \newwrite\auxfile
! 7848: \newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known.
! 7849: \newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
! 7850:
! 7851: % @inforef is relatively simple.
! 7852: \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
! 7853: \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{%
! 7854: \putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
! 7855: node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
! 7856:
! 7857: % @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
! 7858: % cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and
! 7859: % might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
! 7860: % @node foo , bar , ...
! 7861: % We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
! 7862: %
! 7863: \parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
! 7864: %
! 7865: % also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
! 7866: % @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs
! 7867: \def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
! 7868: \def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
! 7869:
! 7870: \let\nwnode=\node
! 7871: \let\lastnode=\empty
! 7872:
! 7873: % Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the
! 7874: % type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
! 7875: %
! 7876: \def\donoderef#1{%
! 7877: \ifx\lastnode\empty\else
! 7878: \setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
! 7879: \global\let\lastnode=\empty
! 7880: \fi
! 7881: }
! 7882:
! 7883: % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
! 7884: %
! 7885: \newcount\savesfregister
! 7886: %
! 7887: \def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
! 7888: \def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
! 7889: \def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
! 7890:
! 7891: % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
! 7892: % anchor), which consists of three parts:
! 7893: % 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection,
! 7894: % or the anchor name.
! 7895: % 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
! 7896: % empty for anchors.
! 7897: % 3) NAME-pg - the page number.
! 7898: %
! 7899: % This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of
! 7900: % floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
! 7901: % 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
! 7902: %
! 7903: \def\setref#1#2{%
! 7904: \pdfmkdest{#1}%
! 7905: \iflinks
! 7906: {%
! 7907: \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them
! 7908: \edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
! 7909: \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
! 7910: ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
! 7911: }%
! 7912: \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}%
! 7913: \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
! 7914: \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
! 7915: \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, at \shipout
! 7916: }%
! 7917: \fi
! 7918: }
! 7919:
! 7920: % @xrefautosectiontitle on|off says whether @section(ing) names are used
! 7921: % automatically in xrefs, if the third arg is not explicitly specified.
! 7922: % This was provided as a "secret" @set xref-automatic-section-title
! 7923: % variable, now it's official.
! 7924: %
! 7925: \parseargdef\xrefautomaticsectiontitle{%
! 7926: \def\temp{#1}%
! 7927: \ifx\temp\onword
! 7928: \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname
! 7929: = \empty
! 7930: \else\ifx\temp\offword
! 7931: \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname
! 7932: = \relax
! 7933: \else
! 7934: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 7935: \errmessage{Unknown @xrefautomaticsectiontitle value `\temp',
! 7936: must be on|off}%
! 7937: \fi\fi
! 7938: }
! 7939:
! 7940: %
! 7941: % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is
! 7942: % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
! 7943: % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
! 7944: % manual. All but the node name can be omitted.
! 7945: %
! 7946: \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
! 7947: \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
! 7948: \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
! 7949: %
! 7950: \newbox\toprefbox
! 7951: \newbox\printedrefnamebox
! 7952: \newbox\infofilenamebox
! 7953: \newbox\printedmanualbox
! 7954: %
! 7955: \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
! 7956: \unsepspaces
! 7957: %
! 7958: % Get args without leading/trailing spaces.
! 7959: \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
! 7960: \setbox\printedrefnamebox = \hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
! 7961: %
! 7962: \def\infofilename{\ignorespaces #4}%
! 7963: \setbox\infofilenamebox = \hbox{\infofilename\unskip}%
! 7964: %
! 7965: \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
! 7966: \setbox\printedmanualbox = \hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
! 7967: %
! 7968: % If the printed reference name (arg #3) was not explicitly given in
! 7969: % the @xref, figure out what we want to use.
! 7970: \ifdim \wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt
! 7971: % No printed node name was explicitly given.
! 7972: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname \relax
! 7973: % Not auto section-title: use node name inside the square brackets.
! 7974: \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
! 7975: \else
! 7976: % Auto section-title: use chapter/section title inside
! 7977: % the square brackets if we have it.
! 7978: \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
! 7979: % It is in another manual, so we don't have it; use node name.
! 7980: \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
! 7981: \else
! 7982: \ifhavexrefs
! 7983: % We (should) know the real title if we have the xref values.
! 7984: \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
! 7985: \else
! 7986: % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
! 7987: \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
! 7988: \fi%
! 7989: \fi
! 7990: \fi
! 7991: \fi
! 7992: %
! 7993: % Make link in pdf output.
! 7994: \ifpdf
! 7995: {\indexnofonts
! 7996: \turnoffactive
! 7997: \makevalueexpandable
! 7998: % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _
! 7999: % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in
! 8000: % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename.
! 8001: \getfilename{#4}%
! 8002: %
! 8003: % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing
! 8004: % spaces in #1, which should be ignored.
! 8005: \edef\pdfxrefdest{#1}%
! 8006: \ifx\pdfxrefdest\empty
! 8007: \def\pdfxrefdest{Top}% no empty targets
! 8008: \else
! 8009: \txiescapepdf\pdfxrefdest % escape PDF special chars
! 8010: \fi
! 8011: %
! 8012: \leavevmode
! 8013: \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
! 8014: \ifnum\filenamelength>0
! 8015: goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}%
! 8016: \else
! 8017: goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}%
! 8018: \fi
! 8019: }%
! 8020: \setcolor{\linkcolor}%
! 8021: \fi
! 8022: %
! 8023: % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
! 8024: % instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the
! 8025: % LABEL-title being set to a magic string.
! 8026: {%
! 8027: % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
! 8028: % include an _ in the xref name, etc.
! 8029: \indexnofonts
! 8030: \turnoffactive
! 8031: \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
! 8032: \csname XR#1-title\endcsname
! 8033: }%
! 8034: \iffloat\Xthisreftitle
! 8035: % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
! 8036: % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
! 8037: \ifdim\wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt
! 8038: \refx{#1-snt}{}%
! 8039: \else
! 8040: \printedrefname
! 8041: \fi
! 8042: %
! 8043: % If the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
! 8044: % "in MANUALNAME".
! 8045: \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
! 8046: \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
! 8047: \fi
! 8048: \else
! 8049: % node/anchor (non-float) references.
! 8050: %
! 8051: % If we use \unhbox to print the node names, TeX does not insert
! 8052: % empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will not
! 8053: % find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals
! 8054: % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens,
! 8055: % this is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name
! 8056: % again, so it is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
! 8057: %
! 8058: \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
! 8059: % Cross-manual reference with a printed manual name.
! 8060: %
! 8061: \crossmanualxref{\cite{\printedmanual\unskip}}%
! 8062: %
! 8063: \else\ifdim \wd\infofilenamebox > 0pt
! 8064: % Cross-manual reference with only an info filename (arg 4), no
! 8065: % printed manual name (arg 5). This is essentially the same as
! 8066: % the case above; we output the filename, since we have nothing else.
! 8067: %
! 8068: \crossmanualxref{\code{\infofilename\unskip}}%
! 8069: %
! 8070: \else
! 8071: % Reference within this manual.
! 8072: %
! 8073: % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
! 8074: % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
! 8075: % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
! 8076: % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
! 8077: % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
! 8078: {\turnoffactive
! 8079: % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
! 8080: % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
! 8081: \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
! 8082: \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
! 8083: }%
! 8084: % output the `[mynode]' via the macro below so it can be overridden.
! 8085: \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
! 8086: %
! 8087: % But we always want a comma and a space:
! 8088: ,\space
! 8089: %
! 8090: % output the `page 3'.
! 8091: \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
! 8092: \fi\fi
! 8093: \fi
! 8094: \endlink
! 8095: \endgroup}
! 8096:
! 8097: % Output a cross-manual xref to #1. Used just above (twice).
! 8098: %
! 8099: % Only include the text "Section ``foo'' in" if the foo is neither
! 8100: % missing or Top. Thus, @xref{,,,foo,The Foo Manual} outputs simply
! 8101: % "see The Foo Manual", the idea being to refer to the whole manual.
! 8102: %
! 8103: % But, this being TeX, we can't easily compare our node name against the
! 8104: % string "Top" while ignoring the possible spaces before and after in
! 8105: % the input. By adding the arbitrary 7sp below, we make it much less
! 8106: % likely that a real node name would have the same width as "Top" (e.g.,
! 8107: % in a monospaced font). Hopefully it will never happen in practice.
! 8108: %
! 8109: % For the same basic reason, we retypeset the "Top" at every
! 8110: % reference, since the current font is indeterminate.
! 8111: %
! 8112: \def\crossmanualxref#1{%
! 8113: \setbox\toprefbox = \hbox{Top\kern7sp}%
! 8114: \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \printedrefname \unskip \kern7sp}%
! 8115: \ifdim \wd2 > 7sp % nonempty?
! 8116: \ifdim \wd2 = \wd\toprefbox \else % same as Top?
! 8117: \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{}\space
! 8118: \fi
! 8119: \fi
! 8120: #1%
! 8121: }
! 8122:
! 8123: % This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
! 8124: % output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
! 8125: % since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly
! 8126: % one that Bob is working on :).
! 8127: %
! 8128: \def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
! 8129:
! 8130: % Things referred to by \setref.
! 8131: %
! 8132: \def\Ynothing{}
! 8133: \def\Yomitfromtoc{}
! 8134: \def\Ynumbered{%
! 8135: \ifnum\secno=0
! 8136: \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
! 8137: \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
! 8138: \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
! 8139: \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
! 8140: \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
! 8141: \else
! 8142: \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
! 8143: \fi\fi\fi
! 8144: }
! 8145: \def\Yappendix{%
! 8146: \ifnum\secno=0
! 8147: \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
! 8148: \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
! 8149: \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
! 8150: \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
! 8151: \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
! 8152: \else
! 8153: \putwordSection@tie
! 8154: @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
! 8155: \fi\fi\fi
! 8156: }
! 8157:
! 8158: % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
! 8159: % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
! 8160: %
! 8161: \def\refx#1#2{%
! 8162: {%
! 8163: \indexnofonts
! 8164: \otherbackslash
! 8165: \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
! 8166: \csname XR#1\endcsname
! 8167: }%
! 8168: \ifx\thisrefX\relax
! 8169: % If not defined, say something at least.
! 8170: \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
! 8171: \iflinks
! 8172: \ifhavexrefs
! 8173: {\toks0 = {#1}% avoid expansion of possibly-complex value
! 8174: \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `\the\toks0'.}}%
! 8175: \else
! 8176: \ifwarnedxrefs\else
! 8177: \global\warnedxrefstrue
! 8178: \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
! 8179: \fi
! 8180: \fi
! 8181: \fi
! 8182: \else
! 8183: % It's defined, so just use it.
! 8184: \thisrefX
! 8185: \fi
! 8186: #2% Output the suffix in any case.
! 8187: }
! 8188:
! 8189: % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's
! 8190: % just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid
! 8191: % collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do.
! 8192: %
! 8193: \def\xrdef#1#2{%
! 8194: {% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current
! 8195: % implementation are changed to commands like @'e. Don't let these
! 8196: % mess up the control sequence name.
! 8197: \indexnofonts
! 8198: \turnoffactive
! 8199: \xdef\safexrefname{#1}%
! 8200: }%
! 8201: %
! 8202: \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref
! 8203: %
! 8204: % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
! 8205: \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname
! 8206: % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
! 8207: \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
! 8208: \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
! 8209: %
! 8210: % Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
! 8211: \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
! 8212: \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
! 8213: \else
! 8214: % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
! 8215: \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
! 8216: \fi
! 8217: %
! 8218: % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
! 8219: % for later use in \listoffloats.
! 8220: \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0
! 8221: {\safexrefname}}%
! 8222: \fi
! 8223: }
! 8224:
! 8225: % Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists.
! 8226: %
! 8227: \def\tryauxfile{%
! 8228: \openin 1 \jobname.aux
! 8229: \ifeof 1 \else
! 8230: \readdatafile{aux}%
! 8231: \global\havexrefstrue
! 8232: \fi
! 8233: \closein 1
! 8234: }
! 8235:
! 8236: \def\setupdatafile{%
! 8237: \catcode`\^^@=\other
! 8238: \catcode`\^^A=\other
! 8239: \catcode`\^^B=\other
! 8240: \catcode`\^^C=\other
! 8241: \catcode`\^^D=\other
! 8242: \catcode`\^^E=\other
! 8243: \catcode`\^^F=\other
! 8244: \catcode`\^^G=\other
! 8245: \catcode`\^^H=\other
! 8246: \catcode`\^^K=\other
! 8247: \catcode`\^^L=\other
! 8248: \catcode`\^^N=\other
! 8249: \catcode`\^^P=\other
! 8250: \catcode`\^^Q=\other
! 8251: \catcode`\^^R=\other
! 8252: \catcode`\^^S=\other
! 8253: \catcode`\^^T=\other
! 8254: \catcode`\^^U=\other
! 8255: \catcode`\^^V=\other
! 8256: \catcode`\^^W=\other
! 8257: \catcode`\^^X=\other
! 8258: \catcode`\^^Z=\other
! 8259: \catcode`\^^[=\other
! 8260: \catcode`\^^\=\other
! 8261: \catcode`\^^]=\other
! 8262: \catcode`\^^^=\other
! 8263: \catcode`\^^_=\other
! 8264: % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
! 8265: % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't
! 8266: % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore,
! 8267: % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
! 8268: % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
! 8269: % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
! 8270: % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could
! 8271: % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't.
! 8272: %
! 8273: % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
! 8274: % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
! 8275: % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
! 8276: %
! 8277: \catcode`\^=\other
! 8278: %
! 8279: % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but...
! 8280: \catcode`\~=\other
! 8281: \catcode`\[=\other
! 8282: \catcode`\]=\other
! 8283: \catcode`\"=\other
! 8284: \catcode`\_=\other
! 8285: \catcode`\|=\other
! 8286: \catcode`\<=\other
! 8287: \catcode`\>=\other
! 8288: \catcode`\$=\other
! 8289: \catcode`\#=\other
! 8290: \catcode`\&=\other
! 8291: \catcode`\%=\other
! 8292: \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
! 8293: %
! 8294: % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \
! 8295: % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than
! 8296: % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \
! 8297: % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value*
! 8298: % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that
! 8299: % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for
! 8300: % now. --karl, 15jan04.
! 8301: \catcode`\\=\other
! 8302: %
! 8303: % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters.
! 8304: {%
! 8305: \count1=128
! 8306: \def\loop{%
! 8307: \catcode\count1=\other
! 8308: \advance\count1 by 1
! 8309: \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi
! 8310: }%
! 8311: }%
! 8312: %
! 8313: % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
! 8314: \catcode`\{=1
! 8315: \catcode`\}=2
! 8316: \catcode`\@=0
! 8317: }
! 8318:
! 8319: \def\readdatafile#1{%
! 8320: \begingroup
! 8321: \setupdatafile
! 8322: \input\jobname.#1
! 8323: \endgroup}
! 8324:
! 8325:
! 8326: \message{insertions,}
! 8327: % including footnotes.
! 8328:
! 8329: \newcount \footnoteno
! 8330:
! 8331: % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
! 8332: % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
! 8333: % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
! 8334: % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
! 8335: % space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
! 8336: \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
! 8337:
! 8338: % @footnotestyle is meaningful for Info output only.
! 8339: \let\footnotestyle=\comment
! 8340:
! 8341: {\catcode `\@=11
! 8342: %
! 8343: % Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain.
! 8344: \gdef\footnote{%
! 8345: \let\indent=\ptexindent
! 8346: \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
! 8347: \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
! 8348: \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
! 8349: %
! 8350: % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
! 8351: % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
! 8352: \let\@sf\empty
! 8353: \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
! 8354: %
! 8355: % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
! 8356: \unskip
! 8357: \thisfootno\@sf
! 8358: \dofootnote
! 8359: }%
! 8360:
! 8361: % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
! 8362: % footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
! 8363: %
! 8364: % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
! 8365: % \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
! 8366: % the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96.
! 8367: %
! 8368: \gdef\dofootnote{%
! 8369: \insert\footins\bgroup
! 8370: % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
! 8371: % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
! 8372: % So reset some parameters.
! 8373: \hsize=\pagewidth
! 8374: \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
! 8375: \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
! 8376: \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
! 8377: \floatingpenalty\@MM
! 8378: \leftskip\z@skip
! 8379: \rightskip\z@skip
! 8380: \spaceskip\z@skip
! 8381: \xspaceskip\z@skip
! 8382: \parindent\defaultparindent
! 8383: %
! 8384: \smallfonts \rm
! 8385: %
! 8386: % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
! 8387: % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use
! 8388: % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
! 8389: % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
! 8390: \let\noindent = \relax
! 8391: %
! 8392: % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the
! 8393: % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
! 8394: \everypar = {\hang}%
! 8395: \textindent{\thisfootno}%
! 8396: %
! 8397: % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this
! 8398: % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
! 8399: % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
! 8400: \footstrut
! 8401: %
! 8402: % Invoke rest of plain TeX footnote routine.
! 8403: \futurelet\next\fo@t
! 8404: }
! 8405: }%end \catcode `\@=11
! 8406:
! 8407: % In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
! 8408: % the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion
! 8409: % would be lost.
! 8410: % Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
! 8411: % text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
! 8412: % And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03.
! 8413:
! 8414: % Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
! 8415: % Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
! 8416: % out prematurely.
! 8417: %
! 8418: \def\startsavinginserts{%
! 8419: \ifx \insert\ptexinsert
! 8420: \let\insert\saveinsert
! 8421: \else
! 8422: \let\checkinserts\relax
! 8423: \fi
! 8424: }
! 8425:
! 8426: % This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
! 8427: % \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
! 8428: %
! 8429: \def\saveinsert#1{%
! 8430: \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
! 8431: \afterassignment\next
! 8432: % swallow the left brace
! 8433: \let\temp =
! 8434: }
! 8435: \def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
! 8436: \def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
! 8437:
! 8438: \def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
! 8439:
! 8440: \def\placesaveins#1{%
! 8441: \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
! 8442: {\box#1}%
! 8443: }
! 8444:
! 8445: % eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
! 8446: {
! 8447: \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-)
! 8448: \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
! 8449: }
! 8450:
! 8451: % initialization:
! 8452: \def\newsaveins #1{%
! 8453: \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
! 8454: \next
! 8455: }
! 8456: \def\newsaveinsX #1{%
! 8457: \csname newbox\endcsname #1%
! 8458: \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
! 8459: \checksaveins #1}%
! 8460: }
! 8461:
! 8462: % initialize:
! 8463: \let\checkinserts\empty
! 8464: \newsaveins\footins
! 8465: \newsaveins\margin
! 8466:
! 8467:
! 8468: % @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
! 8469: % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
! 8470: %
! 8471: % Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image
! 8472: % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
! 8473: % undone and the next image would fail.
! 8474: \openin 1 = epsf.tex
! 8475: \ifeof 1 \else
! 8476: % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
! 8477: % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
! 8478: \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
! 8479: \input epsf.tex
! 8480: \fi
! 8481: \closein 1
! 8482: %
! 8483: % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
! 8484: \newif\ifwarnednoepsf
! 8485: \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
! 8486: work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
! 8487: it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
! 8488: %
! 8489: \def\image#1{%
! 8490: \ifx\epsfbox\thisisundefined
! 8491: \ifwarnednoepsf \else
! 8492: \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
! 8493: \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
! 8494: \global\warnednoepsftrue
! 8495: \fi
! 8496: \else
! 8497: \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
! 8498: \fi
! 8499: }
! 8500: %
! 8501: % Arguments to @image:
! 8502: % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
! 8503: % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
! 8504: % #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
! 8505: % #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
! 8506: % #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing stuff.
! 8507: \newif\ifimagevmode
! 8508: \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
! 8509: \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example
! 8510: \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names
! 8511: % If the image is by itself, center it.
! 8512: \ifvmode
! 8513: \imagevmodetrue
! 8514: \else \ifx\centersub\centerV
! 8515: % for @center @image, we need a vbox so we can have our vertical space
! 8516: \imagevmodetrue
! 8517: \vbox\bgroup % vbox has better behavior than vtop herev
! 8518: \fi\fi
! 8519: %
! 8520: \ifimagevmode
! 8521: \nobreak\medskip
! 8522: % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
! 8523: % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
! 8524: % above and below.
! 8525: \nobreak\vskip\parskip
! 8526: \nobreak
! 8527: \fi
! 8528: %
! 8529: % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing
! 8530: % environment such as @quotation is respected.
! 8531: % However, if we're at the top level, we don't want the
! 8532: % normal paragraph indentation.
! 8533: % On the other hand, if we are in the case of @center @image, we don't
! 8534: % want to start a paragraph, which will create a hsize-width box and
! 8535: % eradicate the centering.
! 8536: \ifx\centersub\centerV\else \noindent \fi
! 8537: %
! 8538: % Output the image.
! 8539: \ifpdf
! 8540: \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
! 8541: \else
! 8542: % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
! 8543: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
! 8544: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
! 8545: \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
! 8546: \fi
! 8547: %
! 8548: \ifimagevmode
! 8549: \medskip % space after a standalone image
! 8550: \fi
! 8551: \ifx\centersub\centerV \egroup \fi
! 8552: \endgroup}
! 8553:
! 8554:
! 8555: % @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
! 8556: % etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
! 8557: % float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future.
! 8558: %
! 8559: \envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}
! 8560:
! 8561: % There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
! 8562: \def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}
! 8563:
! 8564: % #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
! 8565: % "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted,
! 8566: % this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
! 8567: %
! 8568: % #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to
! 8569: % be referable.
! 8570: %
! 8571: % #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It
! 8572: % will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
! 8573: %
! 8574: % We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
! 8575: % chapter-level command.
! 8576: \let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
! 8577: %
! 8578: \def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
! 8579: \let\thiscaption=\empty
! 8580: \let\thisshortcaption=\empty
! 8581: %
! 8582: % don't lose footnotes inside @float.
! 8583: %
! 8584: % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
! 8585: % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
! 8586: %
! 8587: \startsavinginserts
! 8588: %
! 8589: % We can't be used inside a paragraph.
! 8590: \par
! 8591: %
! 8592: \vtop\bgroup
! 8593: \def\floattype{#1}%
! 8594: \def\floatlabel{#2}%
! 8595: \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
! 8596: %
! 8597: \ifx\floattype\empty
! 8598: \let\safefloattype=\empty
! 8599: \else
! 8600: {%
! 8601: % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
! 8602: % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
! 8603: \indexnofonts
! 8604: \turnoffactive
! 8605: \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
! 8606: }%
! 8607: \fi
! 8608: %
! 8609: % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
! 8610: \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
! 8611: % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
! 8612: % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.)
! 8613: %
! 8614: \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
! 8615: \global\advance\floatno by 1
! 8616: %
! 8617: {%
! 8618: % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the
! 8619: % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
! 8620: % labels (which have a completely different output format) from
! 8621: % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the
! 8622: % lists of floats.
! 8623: %
! 8624: \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
! 8625: \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
! 8626: }%
! 8627: \fi
! 8628: %
! 8629: % start with \parskip glue, I guess.
! 8630: \vskip\parskip
! 8631: %
! 8632: % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
! 8633: \restorefirstparagraphindent
! 8634: }
! 8635:
! 8636: % we have these possibilities:
! 8637: % @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
! 8638: % @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1
! 8639: % @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap
! 8640: % @float Foo & no caption: Foo
! 8641: % @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap
! 8642: % @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1
! 8643: % @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap
! 8644: % @float & no caption:
! 8645: %
! 8646: \def\Efloat{%
! 8647: \let\floatident = \empty
! 8648: %
! 8649: % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
! 8650: \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
! 8651: %
! 8652: % If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
! 8653: \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
! 8654: \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
! 8655: \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
! 8656: \fi
! 8657: % the number.
! 8658: \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
! 8659: \fi
! 8660: %
! 8661: % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
! 8662: % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
! 8663: \let\captionline = \floatident
! 8664: %
! 8665: \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
! 8666: \ifx\floatident\empty \else
! 8667: \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
! 8668: \fi
! 8669: %
! 8670: % caption text.
! 8671: \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
! 8672: \fi
! 8673: %
! 8674: % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
! 8675: % Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
! 8676: \ifx\captionline\empty \else
! 8677: \vskip.5\parskip
! 8678: \captionline
! 8679: %
! 8680: % Space below caption.
! 8681: \vskip\parskip
! 8682: \fi
! 8683: %
! 8684: % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this
! 8685: % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
! 8686: \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
! 8687: % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
! 8688: % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short
! 8689: % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
! 8690: {%
! 8691: \atdummies
! 8692: %
! 8693: % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M
! 8694: % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so
! 8695: % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file.
! 8696: \scanexp{%
! 8697: \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{%
! 8698: \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
! 8699: \thiscaption
! 8700: \else
! 8701: \thisshortcaption
! 8702: \fi
! 8703: }%
! 8704: }%
! 8705: \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
! 8706: \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
! 8707: }%
! 8708: \fi
! 8709: \egroup % end of \vtop
! 8710: %
! 8711: % place the captured inserts
! 8712: %
! 8713: % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning
! 8714: % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly
! 8715: % float. --kasal, 26may04
! 8716: %
! 8717: \checkinserts
! 8718: }
! 8719:
! 8720: % Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
! 8721: %
! 8722: \def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
! 8723: \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
! 8724: }
! 8725:
! 8726: % @caption, @shortcaption
! 8727: %
! 8728: \def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
! 8729: \def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
! 8730: \def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption}
! 8731: \def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
! 8732:
! 8733: % The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
! 8734: % going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
! 8735: \def\getfloatno#1{%
! 8736: \ifx#1\relax
! 8737: % Haven't seen this figure type before.
! 8738: \csname newcount\endcsname #1%
! 8739: %
! 8740: % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
! 8741: \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
! 8742: \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
! 8743: \fi
! 8744: \let\floatno#1%
! 8745: }
! 8746:
! 8747: % \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref
! 8748: % to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we
! 8749: % first read the @float command.
! 8750: %
! 8751: \def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
! 8752:
! 8753: % Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
! 8754: % distinguish floats from other xref types.
! 8755: \def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
! 8756:
! 8757: % #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
! 8758: % which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic
! 8759: % \lastsection value which we \setref above.
! 8760: %
! 8761: \def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
! 8762: %
! 8763: % #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the
! 8764: % (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2.
! 8765: %
! 8766: \def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
! 8767: \def\temp{#1}%
! 8768: \def\iffloattype{#2}%
! 8769: \ifx\temp\floatmagic
! 8770: }
! 8771:
! 8772: % @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
! 8773: %
! 8774: \parseargdef\listoffloats{%
! 8775: \def\floattype{#1}% floattype
! 8776: {%
! 8777: % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
! 8778: % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
! 8779: \indexnofonts
! 8780: \turnoffactive
! 8781: \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
! 8782: }%
! 8783: %
! 8784: % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
! 8785: \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
! 8786: \ifhavexrefs
! 8787: % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
! 8788: \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
! 8789: \fi
! 8790: \else
! 8791: \begingroup
! 8792: \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc
! 8793: \let\do=\listoffloatsdo
! 8794: \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
! 8795: \endgroup
! 8796: \fi
! 8797: }
! 8798:
! 8799: % This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the
! 8800: % xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
! 8801: % aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
! 8802: % has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
! 8803: %
! 8804: % Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
! 8805: % they won't appear in the aux file).
! 8806: %
! 8807: \def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
! 8808: \def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
! 8809: % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just
! 8810: % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
! 8811: % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
! 8812: % in pdf output.
! 8813: \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
! 8814: %
! 8815: % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
! 8816: \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
! 8817: \writeentry
! 8818: }}
! 8819:
! 8820:
! 8821: \message{localization,}
! 8822:
! 8823: % For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very
! 8824: % early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language
! 8825: % (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation.
! 8826: %
! 8827: {
! 8828: \catcode`\_ = \active
! 8829: \globaldefs=1
! 8830: \parseargdef\documentlanguage{\begingroup
! 8831: \let_=\normalunderscore % normal _ character for filenames
! 8832: \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
! 8833: % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists.
! 8834: \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
! 8835: \ifeof 1
! 8836: \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore{#1_\finish}%
! 8837: \else
! 8838: \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
! 8839: \input txi-#1.tex
! 8840: \fi
! 8841: \closein 1
! 8842: \endgroup % end raw TeX
! 8843: \endgroup}
! 8844: %
! 8845: % If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist,
! 8846: % try txi-de.tex.
! 8847: %
! 8848: \gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{%
! 8849: \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
! 8850: \ifeof 1
! 8851: \errhelp = \nolanghelp
! 8852: \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
! 8853: \else
! 8854: \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
! 8855: \input txi-#1.tex
! 8856: \fi
! 8857: \closein 1
! 8858: }
! 8859: }% end of special _ catcode
! 8860: %
! 8861: \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
! 8862: is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current
! 8863: directory should work if nowhere else does.}
! 8864:
! 8865: % This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the
! 8866: % \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and
! 8867: % third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin.
! 8868: %
! 8869: % The language names to pass are determined when the format is built.
! 8870: % See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g.,
! 8871: % /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log.
! 8872: %
! 8873: % With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all
! 8874: % available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in
! 8875: % Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the
! 8876: % accented characters problem.)
! 8877: %
! 8878: \catcode`@=11
! 8879: \def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{%
! 8880: % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX.
! 8881: \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax
! 8882: \message{no patterns for #1}%
! 8883: \else
! 8884: \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname
! 8885: \fi
! 8886: % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless.
! 8887: \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax
! 8888: \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax
! 8889: }
! 8890:
! 8891: % Helpers for encodings.
! 8892: % Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number.
! 8893: %
! 8894: \def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{%
! 8895: \count255=128
! 8896: \loop\ifnum\count255<256
! 8897: \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax
! 8898: \advance\count255 by 1
! 8899: \repeat
! 8900: }
! 8901:
! 8902: \def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{%
! 8903: \count255=128
! 8904: \loop\ifnum\count255<256
! 8905: \catcode\count255=#1\relax
! 8906: \advance\count255 by 1
! 8907: \repeat
! 8908: }
! 8909:
! 8910: % @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters
! 8911: % according to the specified encoding.
! 8912: %
! 8913: \parseargdef\documentencoding{%
! 8914: % Encoding being declared for the document.
! 8915: \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}%
! 8916: %
! 8917: % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able
! 8918: % to compare them with \ifx.
! 8919: \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}%
! 8920: \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}%
! 8921: \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}%
! 8922: \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}%
! 8923: \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}%
! 8924: %
! 8925: \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii
! 8926: \asciichardefs
! 8927: %
! 8928: \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo
! 8929: \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
! 8930: \lattwochardefs
! 8931: %
! 8932: \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone
! 8933: \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
! 8934: \latonechardefs
! 8935: %
! 8936: \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine
! 8937: \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
! 8938: \latninechardefs
! 8939: %
! 8940: \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
! 8941: \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
! 8942: \utfeightchardefs
! 8943: %
! 8944: \else
! 8945: \message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}%
! 8946: %
! 8947: \fi % utfeight
! 8948: \fi % latnine
! 8949: \fi % latone
! 8950: \fi % lattwo
! 8951: \fi % ascii
! 8952: }
! 8953:
! 8954: % A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available
! 8955: % the default font encoding (OT1).
! 8956: %
! 8957: \def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}}
! 8958:
! 8959: % Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference.
! 8960: \def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi}
! 8961:
! 8962: % First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be
! 8963: % correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of
! 8964: % macros containing the character definitions.
! 8965: \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
! 8966: %
! 8967: % Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions.
! 8968: \def\latonechardefs{%
! 8969: \gdef^^a0{\tie}
! 8970: \gdef^^a1{\exclamdown}
! 8971: \gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}}
! 8972: \gdef^^a3{{\pounds}}
! 8973: \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
! 8974: \gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}}
! 8975: \gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}}
! 8976: \gdef^^a7{\S}
! 8977: \gdef^^a8{\"{}}
! 8978: \gdef^^a9{\copyright}
! 8979: \gdef^^aa{\ordf}
! 8980: \gdef^^ab{\guillemetleft}
! 8981: \gdef^^ac{$\lnot$}
! 8982: \gdef^^ad{\-}
! 8983: \gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol}
! 8984: \gdef^^af{\={}}
! 8985: %
! 8986: \gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
! 8987: \gdef^^b1{$\pm$}
! 8988: \gdef^^b2{$^2$}
! 8989: \gdef^^b3{$^3$}
! 8990: \gdef^^b4{\'{}}
! 8991: \gdef^^b5{$\mu$}
! 8992: \gdef^^b6{\P}
! 8993: %
! 8994: \gdef^^b7{$^.$}
! 8995: \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
! 8996: \gdef^^b9{$^1$}
! 8997: \gdef^^ba{\ordm}
! 8998: %
! 8999: \gdef^^bb{\guillemetright}
! 9000: \gdef^^bc{$1\over4$}
! 9001: \gdef^^bd{$1\over2$}
! 9002: \gdef^^be{$3\over4$}
! 9003: \gdef^^bf{\questiondown}
! 9004: %
! 9005: \gdef^^c0{\`A}
! 9006: \gdef^^c1{\'A}
! 9007: \gdef^^c2{\^A}
! 9008: \gdef^^c3{\~A}
! 9009: \gdef^^c4{\"A}
! 9010: \gdef^^c5{\ringaccent A}
! 9011: \gdef^^c6{\AE}
! 9012: \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
! 9013: \gdef^^c8{\`E}
! 9014: \gdef^^c9{\'E}
! 9015: \gdef^^ca{\^E}
! 9016: \gdef^^cb{\"E}
! 9017: \gdef^^cc{\`I}
! 9018: \gdef^^cd{\'I}
! 9019: \gdef^^ce{\^I}
! 9020: \gdef^^cf{\"I}
! 9021: %
! 9022: \gdef^^d0{\DH}
! 9023: \gdef^^d1{\~N}
! 9024: \gdef^^d2{\`O}
! 9025: \gdef^^d3{\'O}
! 9026: \gdef^^d4{\^O}
! 9027: \gdef^^d5{\~O}
! 9028: \gdef^^d6{\"O}
! 9029: \gdef^^d7{$\times$}
! 9030: \gdef^^d8{\O}
! 9031: \gdef^^d9{\`U}
! 9032: \gdef^^da{\'U}
! 9033: \gdef^^db{\^U}
! 9034: \gdef^^dc{\"U}
! 9035: \gdef^^dd{\'Y}
! 9036: \gdef^^de{\TH}
! 9037: \gdef^^df{\ss}
! 9038: %
! 9039: \gdef^^e0{\`a}
! 9040: \gdef^^e1{\'a}
! 9041: \gdef^^e2{\^a}
! 9042: \gdef^^e3{\~a}
! 9043: \gdef^^e4{\"a}
! 9044: \gdef^^e5{\ringaccent a}
! 9045: \gdef^^e6{\ae}
! 9046: \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
! 9047: \gdef^^e8{\`e}
! 9048: \gdef^^e9{\'e}
! 9049: \gdef^^ea{\^e}
! 9050: \gdef^^eb{\"e}
! 9051: \gdef^^ec{\`{\dotless i}}
! 9052: \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless i}}
! 9053: \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless i}}
! 9054: \gdef^^ef{\"{\dotless i}}
! 9055: %
! 9056: \gdef^^f0{\dh}
! 9057: \gdef^^f1{\~n}
! 9058: \gdef^^f2{\`o}
! 9059: \gdef^^f3{\'o}
! 9060: \gdef^^f4{\^o}
! 9061: \gdef^^f5{\~o}
! 9062: \gdef^^f6{\"o}
! 9063: \gdef^^f7{$\div$}
! 9064: \gdef^^f8{\o}
! 9065: \gdef^^f9{\`u}
! 9066: \gdef^^fa{\'u}
! 9067: \gdef^^fb{\^u}
! 9068: \gdef^^fc{\"u}
! 9069: \gdef^^fd{\'y}
! 9070: \gdef^^fe{\th}
! 9071: \gdef^^ff{\"y}
! 9072: }
! 9073:
! 9074: % Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions.
! 9075: \def\latninechardefs{%
! 9076: % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1.
! 9077: \latonechardefs
! 9078: %
! 9079: \gdef^^a4{\euro}
! 9080: \gdef^^a6{\v S}
! 9081: \gdef^^a8{\v s}
! 9082: \gdef^^b4{\v Z}
! 9083: \gdef^^b8{\v z}
! 9084: \gdef^^bc{\OE}
! 9085: \gdef^^bd{\oe}
! 9086: \gdef^^be{\"Y}
! 9087: }
! 9088:
! 9089: % Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions.
! 9090: \def\lattwochardefs{%
! 9091: \gdef^^a0{\tie}
! 9092: \gdef^^a1{\ogonek{A}}
! 9093: \gdef^^a2{\u{}}
! 9094: \gdef^^a3{\L}
! 9095: \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
! 9096: \gdef^^a5{\v L}
! 9097: \gdef^^a6{\'S}
! 9098: \gdef^^a7{\S}
! 9099: \gdef^^a8{\"{}}
! 9100: \gdef^^a9{\v S}
! 9101: \gdef^^aa{\cedilla S}
! 9102: \gdef^^ab{\v T}
! 9103: \gdef^^ac{\'Z}
! 9104: \gdef^^ad{\-}
! 9105: \gdef^^ae{\v Z}
! 9106: \gdef^^af{\dotaccent Z}
! 9107: %
! 9108: \gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
! 9109: \gdef^^b1{\ogonek{a}}
! 9110: \gdef^^b2{\ogonek{ }}
! 9111: \gdef^^b3{\l}
! 9112: \gdef^^b4{\'{}}
! 9113: \gdef^^b5{\v l}
! 9114: \gdef^^b6{\'s}
! 9115: \gdef^^b7{\v{}}
! 9116: \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
! 9117: \gdef^^b9{\v s}
! 9118: \gdef^^ba{\cedilla s}
! 9119: \gdef^^bb{\v t}
! 9120: \gdef^^bc{\'z}
! 9121: \gdef^^bd{\H{}}
! 9122: \gdef^^be{\v z}
! 9123: \gdef^^bf{\dotaccent z}
! 9124: %
! 9125: \gdef^^c0{\'R}
! 9126: \gdef^^c1{\'A}
! 9127: \gdef^^c2{\^A}
! 9128: \gdef^^c3{\u A}
! 9129: \gdef^^c4{\"A}
! 9130: \gdef^^c5{\'L}
! 9131: \gdef^^c6{\'C}
! 9132: \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
! 9133: \gdef^^c8{\v C}
! 9134: \gdef^^c9{\'E}
! 9135: \gdef^^ca{\ogonek{E}}
! 9136: \gdef^^cb{\"E}
! 9137: \gdef^^cc{\v E}
! 9138: \gdef^^cd{\'I}
! 9139: \gdef^^ce{\^I}
! 9140: \gdef^^cf{\v D}
! 9141: %
! 9142: \gdef^^d0{\DH}
! 9143: \gdef^^d1{\'N}
! 9144: \gdef^^d2{\v N}
! 9145: \gdef^^d3{\'O}
! 9146: \gdef^^d4{\^O}
! 9147: \gdef^^d5{\H O}
! 9148: \gdef^^d6{\"O}
! 9149: \gdef^^d7{$\times$}
! 9150: \gdef^^d8{\v R}
! 9151: \gdef^^d9{\ringaccent U}
! 9152: \gdef^^da{\'U}
! 9153: \gdef^^db{\H U}
! 9154: \gdef^^dc{\"U}
! 9155: \gdef^^dd{\'Y}
! 9156: \gdef^^de{\cedilla T}
! 9157: \gdef^^df{\ss}
! 9158: %
! 9159: \gdef^^e0{\'r}
! 9160: \gdef^^e1{\'a}
! 9161: \gdef^^e2{\^a}
! 9162: \gdef^^e3{\u a}
! 9163: \gdef^^e4{\"a}
! 9164: \gdef^^e5{\'l}
! 9165: \gdef^^e6{\'c}
! 9166: \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
! 9167: \gdef^^e8{\v c}
! 9168: \gdef^^e9{\'e}
! 9169: \gdef^^ea{\ogonek{e}}
! 9170: \gdef^^eb{\"e}
! 9171: \gdef^^ec{\v e}
! 9172: \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless{i}}}
! 9173: \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless{i}}}
! 9174: \gdef^^ef{\v d}
! 9175: %
! 9176: \gdef^^f0{\dh}
! 9177: \gdef^^f1{\'n}
! 9178: \gdef^^f2{\v n}
! 9179: \gdef^^f3{\'o}
! 9180: \gdef^^f4{\^o}
! 9181: \gdef^^f5{\H o}
! 9182: \gdef^^f6{\"o}
! 9183: \gdef^^f7{$\div$}
! 9184: \gdef^^f8{\v r}
! 9185: \gdef^^f9{\ringaccent u}
! 9186: \gdef^^fa{\'u}
! 9187: \gdef^^fb{\H u}
! 9188: \gdef^^fc{\"u}
! 9189: \gdef^^fd{\'y}
! 9190: \gdef^^fe{\cedilla t}
! 9191: \gdef^^ff{\dotaccent{}}
! 9192: }
! 9193:
! 9194: % UTF-8 character definitions.
! 9195: %
! 9196: % This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some
! 9197: % changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by
! 9198: % permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team.
! 9199: %
! 9200: \newcount\countUTFx
! 9201: \newcount\countUTFy
! 9202: \newcount\countUTFz
! 9203:
! 9204: \gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter
! 9205: \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}
! 9206: %
! 9207: \gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter
! 9208: \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}
! 9209: %
! 9210: \gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter
! 9211: \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}
! 9212:
! 9213: \gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{%
! 9214: \ifx #1\relax
! 9215: \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}%
! 9216: \else
! 9217: \expandafter #1%
! 9218: \fi
! 9219: }
! 9220:
! 9221: \begingroup
! 9222: \catcode`\~13
! 9223: \catcode`\"12
! 9224:
! 9225: \def\UTFviiiLoop{%
! 9226: \global\catcode\countUTFx\active
! 9227: \uccode`\~\countUTFx
! 9228: \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}%
! 9229: \advance\countUTFx by 1
! 9230: \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy
! 9231: \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop
! 9232: \fi}
! 9233:
! 9234: \countUTFx = "C2
! 9235: \countUTFy = "E0
! 9236: \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
! 9237: \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~}}
! 9238: \UTFviiiLoop
! 9239:
! 9240: \countUTFx = "E0
! 9241: \countUTFy = "F0
! 9242: \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
! 9243: \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~}}
! 9244: \UTFviiiLoop
! 9245:
! 9246: \countUTFx = "F0
! 9247: \countUTFy = "F4
! 9248: \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
! 9249: \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~}}
! 9250: \UTFviiiLoop
! 9251: \endgroup
! 9252:
! 9253: \begingroup
! 9254: \catcode`\"=12
! 9255: \catcode`\<=12
! 9256: \catcode`\.=12
! 9257: \catcode`\,=12
! 9258: \catcode`\;=12
! 9259: \catcode`\!=12
! 9260: \catcode`\~=13
! 9261:
! 9262: \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{%
! 9263: \countUTFz = "#1\relax
! 9264: %\wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}%
! 9265: \begingroup
! 9266: \parseXMLCharref
! 9267: \def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{%
! 9268: \csname u8:##1\string ##2\endcsname}%
! 9269: \def\UTFviiiThreeOctets##1##2##3{%
! 9270: \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\endcsname}%
! 9271: \def\UTFviiiFourOctets##1##2##3##4{%
! 9272: \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\string ##4\endcsname}%
! 9273: \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
! 9274: \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
! 9275: \gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}%
! 9276: \endgroup}
! 9277:
! 9278: \gdef\parseXMLCharref{%
! 9279: \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax
! 9280: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 9281: \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}%
! 9282: \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax
! 9283: \parseUTFviiiA,%
! 9284: \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,%
! 9285: \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax
! 9286: \parseUTFviiiA;%
! 9287: \parseUTFviiiA,%
! 9288: \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctets.{,;}%
! 9289: \else
! 9290: \parseUTFviiiA;%
! 9291: \parseUTFviiiA,%
! 9292: \parseUTFviiiA!%
! 9293: \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctets.{!,;}%
! 9294: \fi\fi\fi
! 9295: }
! 9296:
! 9297: \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{%
! 9298: \countUTFx = \countUTFz
! 9299: \divide\countUTFz by 64
! 9300: \countUTFy = \countUTFz
! 9301: \multiply\countUTFz by 64
! 9302: \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz
! 9303: \advance\countUTFx by 128
! 9304: \uccode `#1\countUTFx
! 9305: \countUTFz = \countUTFy}
! 9306:
! 9307: \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{%
! 9308: \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax
! 9309: \uccode `#3\countUTFz
! 9310: \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}}
! 9311: \endgroup
! 9312:
! 9313: \def\utfeightchardefs{%
! 9314: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}
! 9315: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}
! 9316: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds}
! 9317: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}
! 9318: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright}
! 9319: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}
! 9320: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft}
! 9321: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}
! 9322: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol}
! 9323: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}
! 9324:
! 9325: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}
! 9326: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}
! 9327: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}
! 9328: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}
! 9329: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright}
! 9330: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}
! 9331:
! 9332: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}
! 9333: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}
! 9334: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}
! 9335: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}
! 9336: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}
! 9337: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}
! 9338: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}
! 9339: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}
! 9340: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}
! 9341: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}
! 9342: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}
! 9343: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}
! 9344: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}
! 9345: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}
! 9346: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}
! 9347: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}
! 9348:
! 9349: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH}
! 9350: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}
! 9351: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}
! 9352: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}
! 9353: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}
! 9354: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}
! 9355: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}
! 9356: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}
! 9357: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}
! 9358: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}
! 9359: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}
! 9360: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}
! 9361: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}
! 9362: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH}
! 9363: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}
! 9364:
! 9365: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}
! 9366: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}
! 9367: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}
! 9368: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}
! 9369: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}
! 9370: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}
! 9371: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}
! 9372: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}
! 9373: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}
! 9374: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}
! 9375: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}
! 9376: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}
! 9377: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}
! 9378: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}
! 9379: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}
! 9380: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}
! 9381:
! 9382: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh}
! 9383: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}
! 9384: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}
! 9385: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}
! 9386: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}
! 9387: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}
! 9388: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}
! 9389: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}
! 9390: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}
! 9391: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}
! 9392: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}
! 9393: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}
! 9394: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}
! 9395: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th}
! 9396: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}
! 9397:
! 9398: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}
! 9399: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}
! 9400: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}
! 9401: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}
! 9402: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}}
! 9403: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}}
! 9404: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}
! 9405: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}
! 9406: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}
! 9407: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}
! 9408: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}
! 9409: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}
! 9410: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}
! 9411: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}
! 9412: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}
! 9413: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}
! 9414: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}
! 9415:
! 9416: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}
! 9417: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}
! 9418: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}
! 9419: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}
! 9420: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}
! 9421: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}
! 9422: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}
! 9423: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}
! 9424: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}
! 9425: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}
! 9426: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}
! 9427: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}
! 9428:
! 9429: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}
! 9430: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}
! 9431: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}
! 9432: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}
! 9433: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}
! 9434: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}
! 9435: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}
! 9436: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}
! 9437: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}
! 9438: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}
! 9439:
! 9440: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}
! 9441: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}
! 9442: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}
! 9443: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}
! 9444: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}
! 9445: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}
! 9446: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}
! 9447: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}
! 9448:
! 9449: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}
! 9450: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}
! 9451: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}
! 9452: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}
! 9453: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}
! 9454: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}
! 9455: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}
! 9456: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}
! 9457: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}
! 9458: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}
! 9459:
! 9460: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}
! 9461: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}
! 9462: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}
! 9463: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}
! 9464: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}
! 9465: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}
! 9466: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}
! 9467: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}
! 9468: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}
! 9469: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}
! 9470: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}
! 9471: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}
! 9472: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}
! 9473: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}
! 9474:
! 9475: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}
! 9476: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}
! 9477: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}}
! 9478: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}}
! 9479: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}
! 9480:
! 9481: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}
! 9482: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}
! 9483: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}
! 9484: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}
! 9485: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}
! 9486: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}
! 9487: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}
! 9488: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}
! 9489:
! 9490: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}
! 9491: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}
! 9492: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}
! 9493: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}
! 9494: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}
! 9495: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}
! 9496: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}
! 9497: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}
! 9498: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}
! 9499: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}
! 9500: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}
! 9501: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}
! 9502: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}
! 9503:
! 9504: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}
! 9505: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}
! 9506: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}
! 9507: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}
! 9508: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}
! 9509: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}
! 9510: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}
! 9511: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}
! 9512: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}
! 9513: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}
! 9514: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}
! 9515: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}
! 9516:
! 9517: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}
! 9518: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}
! 9519: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}
! 9520: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}
! 9521: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}
! 9522:
! 9523: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}
! 9524: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}
! 9525: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}
! 9526: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}
! 9527: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}
! 9528: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}
! 9529:
! 9530: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}
! 9531: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}
! 9532: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}
! 9533: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}
! 9534: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}
! 9535: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}
! 9536: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}
! 9537: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}
! 9538: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}
! 9539: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}
! 9540: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}
! 9541: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}
! 9542:
! 9543: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}
! 9544: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}
! 9545:
! 9546: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}
! 9547: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}
! 9548: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}
! 9549: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}
! 9550: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}
! 9551: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}
! 9552:
! 9553: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}
! 9554: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}
! 9555: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}
! 9556:
! 9557: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}
! 9558:
! 9559: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}
! 9560: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}
! 9561: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}
! 9562: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}
! 9563: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}
! 9564: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}
! 9565: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}
! 9566: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}
! 9567: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}
! 9568: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}
! 9569: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}
! 9570: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}
! 9571:
! 9572: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}
! 9573: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}
! 9574:
! 9575: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}
! 9576: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}
! 9577: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}
! 9578: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}
! 9579: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}
! 9580: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}
! 9581: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}
! 9582: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}
! 9583:
! 9584: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}
! 9585: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}
! 9586: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}
! 9587: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}
! 9588: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}
! 9589: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}
! 9590: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}
! 9591: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}
! 9592: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}
! 9593: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}
! 9594: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}
! 9595: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}
! 9596:
! 9597: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}
! 9598: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}
! 9599: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}
! 9600: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}
! 9601: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}
! 9602: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}
! 9603: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}
! 9604: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}
! 9605: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}
! 9606: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}
! 9607:
! 9608: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}
! 9609: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}
! 9610: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}
! 9611: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}
! 9612: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}
! 9613: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}
! 9614: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}
! 9615: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}
! 9616: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}
! 9617: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}
! 9618:
! 9619: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}
! 9620: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}
! 9621: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}
! 9622: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}
! 9623: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}
! 9624: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}
! 9625: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}
! 9626: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}
! 9627: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}
! 9628: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}
! 9629:
! 9630: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}
! 9631: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}
! 9632: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}
! 9633: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}
! 9634:
! 9635: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}
! 9636: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}
! 9637: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}
! 9638: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}
! 9639: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}
! 9640: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}
! 9641: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}
! 9642: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}
! 9643: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}
! 9644: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}
! 9645: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}
! 9646: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}
! 9647: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}
! 9648: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}
! 9649: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}
! 9650: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}
! 9651:
! 9652: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}
! 9653: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}
! 9654: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}
! 9655: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}
! 9656: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}
! 9657: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}
! 9658: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}
! 9659: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}
! 9660: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}
! 9661: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}
! 9662:
! 9663: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}
! 9664: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}
! 9665:
! 9666: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}
! 9667: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}
! 9668: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}
! 9669: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}
! 9670:
! 9671: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}
! 9672: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}
! 9673: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}
! 9674: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}
! 9675:
! 9676: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}
! 9677: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}
! 9678:
! 9679: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}
! 9680: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}
! 9681: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}
! 9682:
! 9683: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}
! 9684: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}
! 9685:
! 9686: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}
! 9687: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}
! 9688: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft}
! 9689: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright}
! 9690: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase}
! 9691: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft}
! 9692: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright}
! 9693: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase}
! 9694: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet}
! 9695: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots}
! 9696: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft}
! 9697: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright}
! 9698: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro}
! 9699:
! 9700: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion}
! 9701: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result}
! 9702:
! 9703: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus}
! 9704: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point}
! 9705: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv}
! 9706: }% end of \utfeightchardefs
! 9707:
! 9708:
! 9709: % US-ASCII character definitions.
! 9710: \def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done
! 9711: \relax
! 9712: }
! 9713:
! 9714: % Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with
! 9715: % existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a
! 9716: % document encoding.
! 9717: %
! 9718: \setnonasciicharscatcode \other
! 9719:
! 9720:
! 9721: \message{formatting,}
! 9722:
! 9723: \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
! 9724:
! 9725: \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
! 9726: \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
! 9727: \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
! 9728:
! 9729: % Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
! 9730: \vbadness = 10000
! 9731:
! 9732: % Don't be very finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
! 9733: \hbadness = 6666
! 9734:
! 9735: % Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans.
! 9736: \widowpenalty=10000
! 9737: \clubpenalty=10000
! 9738:
! 9739: % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
! 9740: % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of
! 9741: % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
! 9742: % \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set.
! 9743: %
! 9744: \def\setemergencystretch{%
! 9745: \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
! 9746: % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
! 9747: \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
! 9748: \else
! 9749: \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
! 9750: \fi
! 9751: }
! 9752:
! 9753: % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth;
! 9754: % 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip;
! 9755: % 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width.
! 9756: %
! 9757: % We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
! 9758: % \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip.
! 9759: %
! 9760: \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
! 9761: \voffset = #3\relax
! 9762: \topskip = #6\relax
! 9763: \splittopskip = \topskip
! 9764: %
! 9765: \vsize = #1\relax
! 9766: \advance\vsize by \topskip
! 9767: \outervsize = \vsize
! 9768: \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
! 9769: \pageheight = \vsize
! 9770: %
! 9771: \hsize = #2\relax
! 9772: \outerhsize = \hsize
! 9773: \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
! 9774: \pagewidth = \hsize
! 9775: %
! 9776: \normaloffset = #4\relax
! 9777: \bindingoffset = #5\relax
! 9778: %
! 9779: \ifpdf
! 9780: \pdfpageheight #7\relax
! 9781: \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
! 9782: % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of
! 9783: % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with.
! 9784: \pdfhorigin = 1 true in
! 9785: \pdfvorigin = 1 true in
! 9786: \fi
! 9787: %
! 9788: \setleading{\textleading}
! 9789: %
! 9790: \parindent = \defaultparindent
! 9791: \setemergencystretch
! 9792: }
! 9793:
! 9794: % @letterpaper (the default).
! 9795: \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
! 9796: \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
! 9797: \textleading = 13.2pt
! 9798: %
! 9799: % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
! 9800: \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines
! 9801: {\voffset}{.25in}%
! 9802: {\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
! 9803: {11in}{8.5in}%
! 9804: }}
! 9805:
! 9806: % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size.
! 9807: \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
! 9808: \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
! 9809: \textleading = 12pt
! 9810: %
! 9811: \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
! 9812: {-.2in}{0in}%
! 9813: {\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
! 9814: {9.25in}{7in}%
! 9815: %
! 9816: \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
! 9817: \tolerance = 700
! 9818: \hfuzz = 1pt
! 9819: \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
! 9820: \defbodyindent = .5cm
! 9821: }}
! 9822:
! 9823: % Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size.
! 9824: % (Just testing, parameters still in flux.)
! 9825: \def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1
! 9826: \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt
! 9827: \textleading = 12pt
! 9828: %
! 9829: \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}%
! 9830: {-.2in}{-.4in}%
! 9831: {0pt}{14pt}%
! 9832: {9in}{6in}%
! 9833: %
! 9834: \lispnarrowing = 0.25in
! 9835: \tolerance = 700
! 9836: \hfuzz = 1pt
! 9837: \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
! 9838: \defbodyindent = .4cm
! 9839: }}
! 9840:
! 9841: % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
! 9842: \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
! 9843: \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
! 9844: \textleading = 13.2pt
! 9845: %
! 9846: % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
! 9847: % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
! 9848: % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
! 9849: % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then
! 9850: % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in
! 9851: % your texinfo source file like this:
! 9852: % @tex
! 9853: % \global\normaloffset = -6mm
! 9854: % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
! 9855: % @end tex
! 9856: \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines
! 9857: {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
! 9858: {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
! 9859: {297mm}{210mm}%
! 9860: %
! 9861: \tolerance = 700
! 9862: \hfuzz = 1pt
! 9863: \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
! 9864: \defbodyindent = 5mm
! 9865: }}
! 9866:
! 9867: % Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
! 9868: % From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
! 9869: % He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
! 9870: \def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
! 9871: \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
! 9872: \textleading = 12.5pt
! 9873: %
! 9874: \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
! 9875: {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
! 9876: {\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
! 9877: {210mm}{148mm}%
! 9878: %
! 9879: \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
! 9880: \tolerance = 800
! 9881: \hfuzz = 1.2pt
! 9882: \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
! 9883: \defbodyindent = 2mm
! 9884: \tableindent = 12mm
! 9885: }}
! 9886:
! 9887: % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
! 9888: \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
! 9889: \afourpaper
! 9890: \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
! 9891: {\voffset}{4.6mm}%
! 9892: {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
! 9893: {297mm}{210mm}%
! 9894: %
! 9895: % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
! 9896: \globaldefs = 0
! 9897: }}
! 9898:
! 9899: % Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
! 9900: \def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
! 9901: \afourpaper
! 9902: \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
! 9903: {\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
! 9904: {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
! 9905: {297mm}{210mm}%
! 9906: \globaldefs = 0
! 9907: }}
! 9908:
! 9909: % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
! 9910: % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
! 9911: % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
! 9912: %
! 9913: \parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
! 9914: \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
! 9915: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
! 9916: \globaldefs = 1
! 9917: %
! 9918: \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
! 9919: \setleading{\textleading}%
! 9920: %
! 9921: \dimen0 = #1\relax
! 9922: \advance\dimen0 by \voffset
! 9923: %
! 9924: \dimen2 = \hsize
! 9925: \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
! 9926: %
! 9927: \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
! 9928: {\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
! 9929: {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
! 9930: {\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
! 9931: }}
! 9932:
! 9933: % Set default to letter.
! 9934: %
! 9935: \letterpaper
! 9936:
! 9937:
! 9938: \message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
! 9939:
! 9940: \def^^L{\par} % remove \outer, so ^L can appear in an @comment
! 9941:
! 9942: % DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice.
! 9943: \catcode`\^^? = 14
! 9944:
! 9945: % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
! 9946: \catcode`\"=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"}
! 9947: \catcode`\$=\other \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
! 9948: \catcode`\+=\other \def\normalplus{+}
! 9949: \catcode`\<=\other \def\normalless{<}
! 9950: \catcode`\>=\other \def\normalgreater{>}
! 9951: \catcode`\^=\other \def\normalcaret{^}
! 9952: \catcode`\_=\other \def\normalunderscore{_}
! 9953: \catcode`\|=\other \def\normalverticalbar{|}
! 9954: \catcode`\~=\other \def\normaltilde{~}
! 9955:
! 9956: % This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
! 9957: % (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
! 9958: % where something hairier probably needs to be done.
! 9959: %
! 9960: % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
! 9961: % otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
! 9962: % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
! 9963: % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
! 9964: %
! 9965: \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
! 9966:
! 9967: % Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches
! 9968: % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
! 9969: % italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
! 9970: % this is not a problem.
! 9971: \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
! 9972:
! 9973: % Turn off all special characters except @
! 9974: % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
! 9975: % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
! 9976: % use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
! 9977:
! 9978: \catcode`\"=\active
! 9979: \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
! 9980: \let"=\activedoublequote
! 9981: \catcode`\~=\active \def\activetilde{{\tt\char126}} \let~ = \activetilde
! 9982: \chardef\hat=`\^
! 9983: \catcode`\^=\active \def\activehat{{\tt \hat}} \let^ = \activehat
! 9984:
! 9985: \catcode`\_=\active
! 9986: \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
! 9987: \let\realunder=_
! 9988: % Subroutine for the previous macro.
! 9989: \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
! 9990:
! 9991: \catcode`\|=\active
! 9992: \def|{{\tt\char124}}
! 9993:
! 9994: \chardef \less=`\<
! 9995: \catcode`\<=\active \def\activeless{{\tt \less}}\let< = \activeless
! 9996: \chardef \gtr=`\>
! 9997: \catcode`\>=\active \def\activegtr{{\tt \gtr}}\let> = \activegtr
! 9998: \catcode`\+=\active \def+{{\tt \char 43}}
! 9999: \catcode`\$=\active \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
! 10000:
! 10001: % used for headline/footline in the output routine, in case the page
! 10002: % breaks in the middle of an @tex block.
! 10003: \def\texinfochars{%
! 10004: \let< = \activeless
! 10005: \let> = \activegtr
! 10006: \let~ = \activetilde
! 10007: \let^ = \activehat
! 10008: \markupsetuplqdefault \markupsetuprqdefault
! 10009: \let\b = \strong
! 10010: \let\i = \smartitalic
! 10011: % in principle, all other definitions in \tex have to be undone too.
! 10012: }
! 10013:
! 10014: % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
! 10015: % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
! 10016: % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
! 10017: % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
! 10018: \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
! 10019:
! 10020: % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after
! 10021: % parsing them.
! 10022: \def\turnoffactive{%
! 10023: \normalturnoffactive
! 10024: \otherbackslash
! 10025: }
! 10026:
! 10027: \catcode`\@=0
! 10028:
! 10029: % \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
! 10030: % as in \char`\\.
! 10031: \global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
! 10032: \global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work
! 10033:
! 10034: % \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and
! 10035: % \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines).
! 10036: {\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}}
! 10037:
! 10038: % In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash
! 10039: % in fixed width font.
! 10040: \catcode`\\=\active % @ for escape char from now on.
! 10041:
! 10042: % The story here is that in math mode, the \char of \backslashcurfont
! 10043: % ends up printing the roman \ from the math symbol font (because \char
! 10044: % in math mode uses the \mathcode, and plain.tex sets
! 10045: % \mathcode`\\="026E). It seems better for @backslashchar{} to always
! 10046: % print a typewriter backslash, hence we use an explicit \mathchar,
! 10047: % which is the decimal equivalent of "715c (class 7, e.g., use \fam;
! 10048: % ignored family value; char position "5C). We can't use " for the
! 10049: % usual hex value because it has already been made active.
! 10050: @def@normalbackslash{{@tt @ifmmode @mathchar29020 @else @backslashcurfont @fi}}
! 10051: @let@backslashchar = @normalbackslash % @backslashchar{} is for user documents.
! 10052:
! 10053: % On startup, @fixbackslash assigns:
! 10054: % @let \ = @normalbackslash
! 10055: % \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont.
! 10056: % \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
! 10057: % catcode other. We switch back and forth between these.
! 10058: @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont}
! 10059: @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
! 10060:
! 10061: % Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
! 10062: % the literal character `\'. Also revert - to its normal character, in
! 10063: % case the active - from code has slipped in.
! 10064: %
! 10065: {@catcode`- = @active
! 10066: @gdef@normalturnoffactive{%
! 10067: @let-=@normaldash
! 10068: @let"=@normaldoublequote
! 10069: @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
! 10070: @let+=@normalplus
! 10071: @let<=@normalless
! 10072: @let>=@normalgreater
! 10073: @let\=@normalbackslash
! 10074: @let^=@normalcaret
! 10075: @let_=@normalunderscore
! 10076: @let|=@normalverticalbar
! 10077: @let~=@normaltilde
! 10078: @markupsetuplqdefault
! 10079: @markupsetuprqdefault
! 10080: @unsepspaces
! 10081: }
! 10082: }
! 10083:
! 10084: % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
! 10085: % This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
! 10086: @otherifyactive
! 10087:
! 10088: % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
! 10089: % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
! 10090: % a backslash.
! 10091: %
! 10092: @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
! 10093: @global@let\ = @eatinput
! 10094:
! 10095: % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
! 10096: % the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
! 10097: % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
! 10098: % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
! 10099: % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
! 10100: %
! 10101: @gdef@fixbackslash{%
! 10102: @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
! 10103: @catcode`+=@active
! 10104: @catcode`@_=@active
! 10105: }
! 10106:
! 10107: % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
! 10108: @escapechar = `@@
! 10109:
! 10110: % These (along with & and #) are made active for url-breaking, so need
! 10111: % active definitions as the normal characters.
! 10112: @def@normaldot{.}
! 10113: @def@normalquest{?}
! 10114: @def@normalslash{/}
! 10115:
! 10116: % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
! 10117: % @hashchar{} gets its own user-level command, because of #line.
! 10118: @catcode`@& = @other @def@normalamp{&}
! 10119: @catcode`@# = @other @def@normalhash{#}
! 10120: @catcode`@% = @other @def@normalpercent{%}
! 10121:
! 10122: @let @hashchar = @normalhash
! 10123:
! 10124: @c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and
! 10125: @c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we
! 10126: @c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars.
! 10127: @c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments.
! 10128: @catcode`@'=@active
! 10129: @catcode`@`=@active
! 10130: @markupsetuplqdefault
! 10131: @markupsetuprqdefault
! 10132:
! 10133: @c Local variables:
! 10134: @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
! 10135: @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
! 10136: @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
! 10137: @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
! 10138: @c time-stamp-end: "}"
! 10139: @c End:
! 10140:
! 10141: @c vim:sw=2:
! 10142:
! 10143: @ignore
! 10144: arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115
! 10145: @end ignore
FreeBSD-CVSweb <freebsd-cvsweb@FreeBSD.org>
![[BACK]](/icons/cvsweb/back.gif){kind=icon}
Return to texinfo.tex CVS log ![[TXT]](/icons/cvsweb/text.gif){kind=icon}
![[DIR]](/icons/cvsweb/dir.gif){kind=icon}
Up to [ELWIX - Embedded LightWeight unIX -] / embedaddon / readline / doc